all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.49 MiB | September 02 2009 | |||
1 2 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.83 MiB | September 02 2009 | |||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | November 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | November 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | November 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | November 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | November 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | November 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Report | November 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 | External Photos | September 02 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | September 02 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | September 02 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | September 02 2009 | ||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | September 02 2009 |
1 2 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.49 MiB | September 02 2009 |
INSTRUCTION MANUAL HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER i7600 FOREWORD SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES Thank you for making the IC-7600 your radio of choice. We hope you agree with Icoms philosophy of technology first. Many hours of research and devel-
opment went into the design of your IC-7600. D FEATURES
Ultimate receiver performance: third-order inter-
cept (IP3) of +30 dBm (HF bands only)
Built-in Baudot RTTY and PSK modulator/demodu-
lator and direct PC keyboard connection capability for RTTY and PSK operations without a PC
High resolution spectrum scope center frequency and xed frequency modes, plus mini-scope dis-
plays
USB connectors on front and rear panels
Large LCD with LED backlight IMPORTANT READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before attempting to operate the transceiver. SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for the IC-7600. EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS WORD RWARNING CAUTION NOTE DEFINITION Personal injury, fire hazard or electric shock may occur. Equipment damage may occur. If disregarded, inconvenience only. No risk of personal injury, re or electric shock. The transceiver comes with the following accessories. Qty. q Hand microphone ............................................ 1 w DC power cable ............................................... 1 e Spare fuse (ATC 5 A) ...................................... 1 r Spare fuse (ATC 30 A) .................................... 2 t 3.5 (d) mm plug ................................................. 1 q w e t r FCC INFORMATION FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equip-
ment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interfer-
ence by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated (Japan) in the United States, the United King-
dom, Germany, France, Spain, Russia and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trade-
marks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other products or brands are registered trademarks or trade-
marks of their respective holders. i PRECAUTIONS R WARNING HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER attach an antenna or internal antenna connector during transmission. This may result in an electrical shock or burn. R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver with a headset or other audio accessories at high volume levels. Hearing experts advise against continu-
ous high volume operation. If you experience a ringing in your ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use. R WARNING! Immediately turn the transceiver power OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom dealer or distributor for advice. R CAUTION! NEVER put the transceiver in any unstable place (such as on a slanted surface or vibrated place). This may cause injury and/or damage to the transceiver. R CAUTION! NEVER change the internal settings of the transceiver. This may reduce trans-
ceiver performance and/or damage to the transceiver. In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits, such as output power, idling current, etc., might damage the expensive final devices. The transceiver warranty does not cover any prob-
lems caused by unauthorized internal adjustment. R CAUTION! NEVER apply AC power to the
[DC13.8V] socket on the transceiver rear panel. This could cause a fire or damage the transceiver. R CAUTION! NEVER apply more than 16 V DC, such as a 24 V battery, to the [DC13.8V] socket on the transceiver rear panel. This could cause a fire or damage the transceiver. R CAUTION! NEVER let metal, wire or other objects protrude into the transceiver or into connectors on the rear panel. This may result in an electric shock. R CAUTION! NEVER block any cooling vents on the top, rear or bottom of the transceiver. R CAUTION! NEVER expose the transceiver to rain, snow or any liquids. R CAUTION! NEVER install the transceiver in a place without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation may be reduced, and the transceiver may be damaged. R CAUTION! NEVER operate or touch the trans-
ceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric shock or damage to the transceiver. DO NOT use chemical agents such as benzine or alcohol when cleaning the IC-7600, as they can damage the transceivers surfaces. DO NOT push the PTT switch when you dont actu-
ally desire to transmit. DO NOT use or place the transceiver in areas with temperatures below 0C (+32F) or above +50C
(+122F). DO NOT place the transceiver in excessively dusty environments or in direct sunlight. DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or putting anything on top of the transceiver. This may overheat the transceiver. Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadver-
tent use by children. BE CAREFUL! If you use a linear amplifier, set the transceivers RF output power to less than the linear amplifiers maximum input level, otherwise, the linear amplifier will be damaged. BE CAREFUL! The heatsink will become hot when operating the transceiver continuously for long peri-
ods of time. Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional). Other manufacturers microphones have different pin assignments, and connection to the IC-7600 may damage the transceiver or microphone. The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a malfunction or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD displays. During maritime mobile operation, keep the trans-
ceiver and microphone as far away as possible from the magnetic navigation compass to prevent errone-
ous indications. Turn the transceiver power OFF and/or disconnect the DC power cable when you will not use the trans-
ceiver for long period of time. For U.S.A. only CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device, not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your authority to operate this device under FCC regula-
tions. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i TABLE OF CONTENTS i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i TABLE OF CONTENTS i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 i 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel q TIMER POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER T X RX SPLIT LOCK w e r t y TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR PHONES BAL NR ELEC-KEY MIC NB NR AF RF/SQL SPLIT DUAL WATCH 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 CHANGE GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT TWIN-PBT MAIN
/SUB XFC MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH TS RIT TX CLEAR RIT/ TX SPEECH LOCK MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY u i o !0 q POWER SWITCH [POWERTIMER] (p. ??) While transceivers power is OFF:
Push to turn the transceiver power ON. Turn the optional DC power supply ON in advance. The indicator on this switch lights green when pow-
ered ON. While transceivers power is ON:
Push momentarily to toggle the timer function ON and OFF. (p. ??) The indicator on this switch lights red when the timer function is ON.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the transceiver power OFF. w TRANSMIT SWITCH [TRANSMIT]
Selects transmit or receive. The [TX] indicator lights red while transmitting and the
[RX] indicator lights green when the squelch is open. e HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]
Accepts standard stereo headphones. Output power: 5 mW with an 8 load. When headphones are connected, the internal speaker or connected external speaker does not function. 1 r ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY]
Accepts a paddle to activate the internal electronic keyer for CW operation. (p. ??) You can select internal electronic keyer, bug-key or straight key operation in keyer CW-key screen. (p. ??) A straight key jack is located on the rear panel. See
[KEY] on p. ??. Keyer polarity (dot and dash) can be reversed in keyer CW-key screen. (p. ??) A 4-channel memory keyer is available for your conve-
nience. (p. ??)
(dot)
(com)
(dash) t USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR
(A type) [USB] (A) (p. ??)
Insert USB-Memory* for both reading/storing a wide variety of the transceivers information and data. The indicator above the connectors lights or blinks when the transceiver reads or writes to the memory data. Unmount operation should be performed before re-
moving the USB-Memory* (p.??).
Connects a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK op-
erations. USB keyboards* are supported.
*: USB-Memory or USB keyboard is not supplied by Icom. y MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC]
Accepts the supplied or optional microphone. See p. ?? for appropriate microphones. See p. ?? for microphone connector information. u MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC GAIN] (p. ??) Adjusts microphone input gain. The transmit audio tone in SSB, AM and FM modes can be adjusted independently in set mode. (p. ??)
How to set the microphone gain. Set the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC meter occasionally moves up-scale during normal voice transmission in SSB, AM or FM mode. Increases Push Decreases Recommended level for an Icom microphone MIC GAIN i AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; p. ??) Varies the audio output level of the speaker or headphones. Increases Decreases o RF POWER CONTROL [RF PWR] (p. ??) Continuously varies the RF output power from mini-
mum (2 W*) to maximum (100 W*).
*AM mode: 1 W to 30 W Increases max. 100 W
(30 W for AM) Push Decreases min. 2 W
(1 W for AM) PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
!0 RF GAIN CONTROL/SQUELCH CONTROL
[RF/SQL] (outer control; p. ??) Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold level. The squelch removes noise output from the speaker
(closed condition) when no signal is received. The squelch is particularly effective for FM. It is also available for other modes. 12 to 1 oclock position is recommended for any setting of the [RF/SQL] control. The control can be set as Auto (RF gain control in SSB, CW and RTTY; squelch control in AM and FM) or squelch control (RF gain is xed at maximum) in set mode as follows. (p. ??) MODE SSB, CW RTTY/PSK AM, FM SET MODE SETTING AUTO RF GAIN SQL SQL SQL SQL RF GAIN + SQL RF GAIN + SQL RF GAIN + SQL When setting as RF gain/squelch control Squelch is open. RF gain adjustable range Noise squelch (FM mode) Recommended level Maximum RF gain S-meter squelch When functioning as RF gain control
(Squelch is xed open; SSB, CW, RTTY only) Adjustable range Minimum RF gain Maximum RF gain When functioning as squelch control
(RF gain is xed at maximum.) Noise squelch (FM mode) Noise squelch threshold
(FM mode) Squelch is open. S-meter squelch threshold S-meter squelch Shallow Deep While rotating the RF gain control, noise may be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction. 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (continued)
!3 TIMER POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR PHONES BAL NR ELEC-KEY MIC NB NR AF RF/SQL T X RX SPLIT LOCK SPLIT DUAL WATCH 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 CHANGE GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT TWIN-PBT MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE XFC MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH TS MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY
!1
!2 RIT TX CLEAR RIT/ TX SPEECH LOCK
!1 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL
[BK-IN DELAY] (p. ??)
Adjusts the transmit-to-receive switching delay time for CW semi-break-in operations.
!3 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHES Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD display to the right of these switches. Functions vary depending on the operating condition. Long delay for slow speed keying (13 dot) MF1 (MULTI-FUNCTION 1 SWITCH) ANT SWITCH (ANT) Push Short delay for high speed keying (2 dot)
!2 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL
[KEY SPEED] (p. ??) Adjusts keying speed for the internal electronic CW keyer from 6 wpm (min.) to 48 wpm (max.). Fast
(48 wpm) Push Slow
(6 wpm)
Selects the antenna connector be-
tween ANT1 and ANT2 when pushed.
(p. ??)
Turns the [RX ANT] (receive antenna) ON and OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec. When the receive antenna is activated, the antenna which is connected to the
[ANT1] or [ANT2] is used for transmis-
sion only. When a transverter is in use, this [ANT]
does not function and TRV appears. MF2 (MULTI-FUNCTION 2 SWITCH) METER SWITCH (METER)
Selects RF power (Po), SWR, ALC, COMP, VD or ID metering during trans-
mit. (p. ??)
Switches the multi-function digital meter ON and OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. ??)
3 MF3 (MULTI-FUNCTION 3 SWITCH) P.AMP SWITCH (P.AMP)
Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps or bypasses them. (p. ??) P. AMP1 activates 10 dB preamp. P. AMP2 activates 16 dB high-gain pre-
amp. P. AMP OFF can also be selected.
Turns the preamp function OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. ??)
What is the preamp?
The preamp amplies signals in the front end to im-
prove S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select P. AMP1 or P. AMP2 when receiving weak signals. MF4 (MULTI-FUNCTION 4 SWITCH) ATT SWITCH (ATT)
Selects 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB attenua-
tor when pushed. (p. ??) ATT OFF can also be selected.
Turns the attenuator function OFF when pushed and held for 1 sec.
(p. ??)
What is the attenuator?
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being distorted when very strong signals are near the de-
sired frequency, or when very strong electromag-
netic elds, such as from a broadcasting station, are near your location. MF5 (MULTI-FUNCTION 5 SWITCH) AGC SWITCH (AGC)
Activates and selects fast, middle or slow AGC time constant when pushed.
(p. ??) In FM mode, only FAST is available.
Enters the AGC set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. ??) AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec. (depends on mode), or turned OFF. When AGC is OFF, the S-
meter does not function.
What is the AGC?
The AGC controls receiver gain to produce a con-
stant audio output level, even when the received signal strength varies dramatically. Select FAST for tuning and then select MID or SLOW depend-
ing on the receiving condition. PANEL DESCRIPTION 1 MF6 (MULTI-FUNCTION 6 SWITCH) VOX SWITCH (VOX)
Push to turn the VOX function ON and OFF during SSB, AM and FM mode operation. (p. ??)
Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter VOX set mode. (p. ??)
What is the VOX function?
The VOX function (voice operated transmission) activates transmission without pushing the trans-
mit switch or PTT switch when you speak into the microphone; then automatically returns to receive when you stop speaking. BK-IN SWITCH (BK-IN)
Selects semi break-in, full break-in op-
eration, or turns the break-in operation OFF when pushed in CW mode.
(p. ??)
What is the break-in function?
The break-in function switches transmit and receive with CW keying. Full break-in function (QSK) can monitor the receive signal during keying. MF7 (MULTI-FUNCTION 7 SWITCH) COMP SWITCH (COMP)
Turns the speech compressor ON and OFF in SSB mode. (p. ??)
Switches the narrow, middle or wide compression when pushed and held for 1 sec.
What is the speech compressor?
The speech compressor compresses the transmit-
ter audio input to increase the average audio output level, to increase talk power. This function is effec-
tive for long-distance communication or when prop-
agation conditions are poor. 14 SWITCH (14)
Turns the 14 speed tuning function ON and OFF in SSB data, CW, RTTY and PSK modes. (p. ??) 14 function sets dial rotation to 14 of nor-
mal speed for ne tuning. TONE SWITCH (TONE)
Switches between the tone encoder, tone squelch function and no-tone operation when pushed in FM mode.
(pgs. ??, ??)
Enters the tone set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. in FM mode.
(pgs. ??, ??)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 4 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (continued)
!4!5!6 TIMER POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR PHONES BAL NR ELEC-KEY MIC NB NR AF RF/SQL
!7
!8
!9 T X RX SPLIT LOCK SPLIT DUAL WATCH 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 CHANGE GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT TWIN-PBT MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE XFC MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH TS MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY RIT TX CLEAR RIT/ TX SPEECH LOCK
@0
@1
@2 @3
@6@5@4
@7
@8
@9
!8 BALANCE CONTROL [BAL] (inner control; p. ??) Adjusts the audio output balance between main and sub readout frequencies while in dualwatch. Increases sub readout gain Increases main readout gain
!9 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH [NB] (p. ??)
Switches the noise blanker ON and OFF when pushed. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type noise such as that generated by automobile igni-
tion systems. This function cannot be used in FM mode, or on non-pulse-type noise. The indicator on this switch lights green while the function is activated.
Enters the noise blanker level set mode when pushed and held for 1 sec.
@0 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES [F-1] to [F-6]
Push to select the function indicated in the LCD dis-
play above these switches. Functions vary depending on the operating condition.
!4 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH [NR] (p. ??)
Push to switch DSP noise reduction ON and OFF. The indicator on this switch lights green when the func-
tion is activated.
!5 MONITOR SWITCH [MONITOR] (p. ??) Monitors your transmitted IF signal. The CW sidetone functions regardless of the [MONI-
TOR] switch setting in CW mode. The indicator on this switch lights green while the func-
tion is activated.
!6 ANTENNA TUNER SWITCH [TUNER] (p. ??)
Turns the internal antenna tuner ON and OFF
(bypass) when pushed momentarily. The indicator on this switch lights green when the tuner is turned ON, goes off when tuner is turned OFF (bypassed).
Tunes the antenna tuner manually when pushed and held for 1 sec. The indicator on this switch blinks red during manual tuning. When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, the tuning circuit is bypassed automatically after 20 sec.
!7 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]
(outer control; p. ??)
Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the noise reduction function is in use. Set for maximum readability. To use this control, push [NR] (!4) in advance.
Increases Decreases 5 PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
@5 VOICE MEMORY PLAYBACK SWITCH [PLAY]
(p. ??)
Push to playback the previously recorded audio for the preset time period.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to playback all of the previously recorded audio.
@6 AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH [AUTO TUNE]
(p. ??) Turns the automatic tuning function ON and OFF in CW and AM modes. IMPORTANT!
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a sig-
nal with interference, the automatic tuning func-
tion may tune the receiver to an undesired signal.
@7 MAIN DIAL Changes the displayed frequency, selects set mode setting, etc.
@8 SPEECH/LOCK SWITCH [SPEECH/LOCK]
Push to announce the S-meter indication and the selected frequency. (p. ??) The parameters to be announced can be selected in the others set mode. (p. ??)
Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the dial lock function ON and OFF. (p. ??) The dial lock function electronically locks the main dial. The lock indicator lights while the dial lock function is activated. NOTE: The [SPEECH/LOCK] switch operation to activate the voice synthesizer or the dial lock functions can be replaced in others set mode screen. (p. ??)
@9 RIT/TX CONTROL [RIT/TX] (pgs. ??, ??) Shifts the receive and/or transmit frequency with-
out changing the transmit and/or receive frequency shown on the main VFO while the RIT and/or TX functions are/is ON. Rotate the control clockwise to increase the frequency, or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. The RIT or TX functions must be ON. The shift frequency range is 9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps
(or 9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps). High shift Low shift
@1 MODE SWITCHES Selects the desired mode. (p. ??) Announces the selected mode via the speech synthe-
sizer. (p. ??)
[SSB]
Selects USB and LSB modes alternately when pushed.
Selects SSB data mode (USB-D, LSB-D) when pushed and held for 1 sec. in SSB mode. In SSB data mode, push to return to SSB mode.
Switches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held for 1 sec. in SSB data mode.
[CW]
Selects CW and CW-R (CW reverse) modes alter-
nately when pushed.
[RTTY/PSK]
Selects RTTY and PSK modes alternately when pushed.
Switches RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY reverse) mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. in RTTY mode.
Switches PSK and PSK-R (PSK reverse) mode when pushed and held for 1 sec. in PSK mode.
[AM/FM]
Selects AM and FM modes alternately.
Selects AM or FM data mode (AM-D/FM-D) when pushed and held for 1 sec. in AM or FM mode, respectively. In AM or FM data mode, push to return to AM or FM mode, respectively.
Switches D1, D2 and D3 when pushed and held for 1 sec. in AM or FM data mode.
@2 FILTER SWITCH [FILTER] (p. ??)
Push to select one of 3 IF lter settings.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to display the lter set screen.
@3 EXIT/SET SWITCH [EXIT/SET]
Push to exit, or return to the previous screen in-
dication during spectrum scope, memory, scan or set mode screen display.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to display the set mode menu screen.
@4 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH [REC]
(p. ??)
Push to record the previous received signal for the preset time period. The preset time period can be set in voice set mode.
(p. ??)
Push and hold for 1 sec. to record the received signal until the recording is cancelled. Push this switch momentarily to stop recording. The memory records the latest 30 sec. of audio. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 6 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (continued) TIMER POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR PHONES BAL NR ELEC-KEY MIC NB NR AF RF/SQL
#0
#3#2#1
#5#4
#6 #7
#8
#9
$0 T X RX SPLIT LOCK SPLIT DUAL WATCH 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 CHANGE GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT TWIN-PBT MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE XFC MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH TS
$1
$2
$3 RIT TX CLEAR RIT/ TX SPEECH LOCK MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY
$5
$4
#0 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX]
Lights red while transmitting.
#1 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX]
Lights green while receiving a signal and when the squelch is open.
#2 LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. ??) Shows the operating frequency, function switch menus, spectrum scope screen, memory list screen, set mode settings, etc.
#3 SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR [SPLIT]
Lights during split frequency operation.
#4 MAIN/SUB CHANGE SWITCH [CHANGE]
Switches the frequency and selected memory channel between main and sub readouts when pushed. Switches between transmit frequency and receive frequency when the split frequency function is ON.
(p. ??)
Equalizes the sub readout frequency to the main readout frequency when pushed and held for 1 sec.
#5 LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. ??) Lights when the dial lock function is activated.
#6 DUALWATCH SWITCH [DUALWATCH] (p. ??)
Push to turn the dualwatch function ON and OFF. appears when the dualwatch function is in use.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the dualwatch function ON and equalizes the sub readout fre-
quency to the main readout. (Quick dualwatch function) The quick dualwatch function can be turned OFF in others set mode. (p. ??) 7
#7 SPLIT SWITCH [SPLIT] (p. ??)
Push to turn the split function ON and OFF. appears when the split function is in use.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to activate the quick split function. The split function ON and equalize the sub readout frequency to the main readout and sets the sub read-
out for frequency input in non-FM modes. (p. ??) The offset frequency is shifted from the selected VFO frequency in FM mode. (p. ??) The quick split function can be turned OFF in others set mode. (p. ??)
#8 KEYPAD
Pushing a key selects the operating band. (p. ??)
Pushing the same key 2 or 3 times calls up other
[GEN ] selects the general coverage band. stacked frequencies in the band. (p. ??) Icoms triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre-
quencies in each band.
After pushing [F-INP ENT], push a key on the keypad to enter a numeric frequency. After en-
tering, push [F-INP ENT] to select the desired frequency directly (p. ??) e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz;
Push [F-INP ENT] [1] [4] [] [1] [9] [5] [F-INP ENT].
After pushing [F-INP ENT], push a key on the keypad to enter a memory channel. after enter-
ing, push []/[] to select the desired memory channel directly. (p. ??)
#9 PBT CLEAR SWITCH [PBT-CLR] (p. ??) Push and hold for 1 sec. to clear the PBT settings. The indicator on this switch lights green when PBT is in use.
$0 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN-PBT]
(p. ??) Adjusts the receivers IF lter passband width via the DSP. Passband width and shift frequency are displayed in the multi-function display. Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the PBT settings. Adjustment range is set to half of the IF lter passband width. 25 Hz steps and 100 Hz steps are available.
What is the PBT control?
The PBT function electronically modies the IF passband width to reject interference. This transceiver uses the DSP circuit for the PBT function. PBT1 PBT2
+
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
$2 TX SWITCH [TX] (p. ??)
Push to turn the TX function ON and OFF.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the TX shift Use [RIT/TX] control to vary the TX frequency. frequency to the operating frequency.
What is the TX function?
TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the re-
ceive frequency. This is useful for simple split frequency operation in CW, etc.
$3 CLEAR SWITCH [CLEAR] (pgs. ??, ??) Push or push and hold for 1 sec.* to clear the RIT/
TX shift frequency.
* Depending on the quick RIT/TX clear function setting
(p. ??).
$4 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK SWITCH
[XFC] (p. ??) Monitors the transmit frequency (including TX fre-
quency offset) when pushed and held during split frequency operation. While pushing and holding this switch, the transmit frequency can be changed with the main dial, keypad, memo pad or []/[] switches. When the split lock function is turned ON, pushing [XFC]
cancels the dial lock function. (p. ??)
$5 MAIN/SUBM.SCOPE SWITCH
[MAIN/SUBM.SCOPE]
High cut Center Low cut
Push to select access to the main or sub read-
out. (p. ??) The selected readout frequency is displayed clearly. The sub readout functions only during split operation or dualwatch.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the mini spec-
trum scope screen indication ON and OFF.
(p. ??) The mini spectrum scope screen can be indicated with another screen, such as memory, set mode screen, simultaneously.
$1 NOTCH SWITCH [NOTCH] (p. ??)
Switches the notch function between auto, man-
ual and OFF in SSB and AM modes.
Turns the manual notch function ON and OFF when pushed in CW, RTTY and PSK mode.
Turns the auto notch function ON and OFF when pushed in FM mode. No indicator appears when the notch function is not appears when manual notch is in use. appears when auto notch is in use. in use.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to switch the manual notch characteristics from wide, middle and nar-
row when manual notch function is activated. The indicator on this switch lights green when the function is activated.
What is the notch function?
The notch function is a narrow lter that eliminates un-
wanted CW or AM carrier tones while preserving the de-
sired voice signal. The DSP circuit automatically adjusts the notch frequency to effectively eliminate unwanted tones. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 8 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Front panel (continued) TIMER POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR PHONES BAL NR ELEC-KEY MIC NB NR AF RF/SQL T X RX SPLIT LOCK
$6
$7 $8 $9 %0 %1 SPLIT DUAL WATCH 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 CHANGE GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT TWIN-PBT MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE XFC MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH TS
%2
%3
%4
%5 RIT TX CLEAR RIT/ TX SPEECH LOCK MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY
$6 MEMORY UP/DOWN SWITCHES []/[] (p. ??)
Push to select the desired memory channel. Memory channels can be selected both in VFO and memory modes.
Push to select the desired memory channel di-
rectly after pushing [F-INP ENT] and a memory channel number.
$7 MEMO PAD-WRITE SWITCH [MP-W] (p. ??) Programs the displayed readout frequency and op-
erating mode into a memo pad. The 5 most recent entries remain in memo pads. The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10 in others set mode. (p. ??)
$8 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. ??) Stores the selected readout frequency and operat-
ing mode into the displayed memory channel when pushed and held for 1 sec. This function is available both in VFO and memory modes.
$9 MEMO PAD-READ SWITCH [MP-R] (p. ??) Each push calls up a frequency and operating mode in a memo pad. The 5 (or 10) most recently programmed frequencies and operating modes can be recalled, starting from the most recent. The memo pad capacity can be expanded from 5 to 10 in others set mode. (p. ??) 9
%0 VFO/MEMORY SWITCH [VFO/MEMO]
Switches the selected readout operating mode between the VFO and memory when pushed.
(pgs. ??, ??)
Transfers the memory contents to VFO when pushed and held for 1 sec. (p. ??)
%1 QUICK TUNING SWITCH [TS]
Turns the quick tuning step ON and OFF. (p. ??) While the quick tuning indicator, Z, is displayed above the frequency indication, the frequency can be changed in programmed kHz steps. 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 and 25 kHz steps are avail-
able for each operating mode independently.
When the quick tuning step is ON, push and hold for 1 sec. to enter quick tuning step set mode.
(p. ??)
When the quick tuning step is OFF, push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON and OFF. (p. ??)
%2 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER SWITCH [APF/TPF]
appears when audio peak lter is in use. During CW mode operation (p. ??)
Push to turn the audio peak lter ON and OFF.
When the audio peak lter is ON, push and hold for 1 sec. to select the APF passband width from WIDE, MID and NAR or from 320, 160 and 80 Hz depending on APF type setting. During RTTY mode operation (p. ??)
Push to turn the twin peak lter ON and OFF. appears when twin peak lter is in use. The indicator on this switch lights green when the function is activated. PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
%3 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH]
(outer control; p. ??) Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW side tone pitch without changing the operating fre-
quency. Higher frequency Lower frequency
%4 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]
(inner control; p. ??) Varies the notch frequency of the manual notch l-
ter to reject an interfering signal while the manual notch function is ON. Notch lter center frequency:
LSB : 1040 Hz to 4060 Hz USB : 1060 Hz to 4040 Hz CW
: CW pitch freq. 2540 Hz to CW pitch freq. 2540 Hz
: 5100 Hz to 5100 Hz AM Higher frequency Lower frequency
%5 RIT SWITCH [RIT] (p. ??)
Push to turn the RIT function ON and OFF.
Push and hold for 1 sec. to add the RIT shift fre-
Use [RIT/TX] control to vary the RIT frequency. quency to the operating frequency.
What is the RIT function?
The RIT (Receiver Incremental Tuning) shifts the receive frequency without shifting the transmit frequency. This is useful for ne tuning stations calling you off-fre-
quency or when you prefer to listen to slightly different-
sounding voice characteristics, etc. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 10 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Rear panel q w e r 1 ANT 2 DC 13.8V X-VERTER IN OUT ALC SEND 1 2 KEY METER REMOTE EXT-SP RX-ANT ACC TUNER
!7
!6 !5 !4 !3
!2
!1 o!0 i u ty q GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. ??) Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent electri-
cal shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems. w ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [ANT1]
e ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT2] (pgs. ??, ??) Accept a 50 antenna with a PL-259 plug connec-
tor. When using an optional AH-4 HF/50 MHz AUTO-
MATIC ANTENNA TUNER, connect it to the [ANT1]
connector. The internal antenna tuner activates for [ANT2] and deactivates for [ANT1] when con-
necting the AH-4. r DC POWER SOCKET [DC 13.8V] (p. ??) Accepts 13.8 V DC through the supplied DC power cable. Rear panel view u USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTOR (B type)
[USB] (B) Connect an USB cable to be used for the modula-
tion input (p. ??), the transceiver operation with PC and the received audio import to the PC. CAUTION:
For Windows XP/2000:
NEVER install the USB driver into the PC before connecting the transceiver and PC using with an USB cable. For Windows Vista:
NEVER connect a PC using with an USB cable until the USB driver installation has been com-
pleted. About the USB driver:
Icom HP (http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/
index.html) gives the USB driver and the installa-
tion guide download service. t EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP] (p. ??) Connects an external speaker (48 ), if desired. y CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]
(pgs. ??, ??)
Connects a PC via the optional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER for external control of the transceiver.
Used for transceive operation with another Icom CI-V transceiver or receiver. 11 The following items are required:
PC Microsoft Windows XP/2000 or Microsoft Windows Vista installed With USB port Other items USB cable (third partys) PC software About the modulation input:
Select USB in the ACC set mode item DATA OFF MOD, DATA1 MOD, DATA2 MOD or DATA3 MOD. And the modulation input level from USB jack can be set in the ACC set mode item USB MOD Level.
(p. ??) i METER JACK [METER] (p. ??) Outputs a signal showing received signal strength, transmit output power, VSWR, ALC, speech com-
pression, VD or ID level for external meter indica-
tion. o STRAIGHT KEY JACK [KEY] (p. ??) Accepts a straight key or external electronic keyer with 14 inch standard plug.
[ELEC-KEY] on the front panel can be used for a straight key or external electronic keyer. Deactivate the internal electronic keyer in keyer set mode. (p. ??)
(+)
(_)
!0 ACCESSORY SOCKET 1 [ACC 1]
!1 ACCESSORY SOCKET 2 [ACC 2]
Enable connection of external equipment such as a linear amplier, an automatic antenna selector/
tuner, a TNC for data communications, etc. See p. ?? for socket information.
!2 TUNER CONTROL SOCKET [TUNER] (p. ??) Accepts the control cable from an optional AH-4 HF/50 MHz AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER.
!3 SEND CONTROL JACK [SEND] (p. ??) Connects to ground when transmitting to control an external unit, such as a non-Icom linear amplier. NOTE: T/R control voltage and current must be lower than 16 V DC/0.5 A (or 250 V AC, 200 mA with MOSFET switching).
!4 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. ??) Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom lin-
ear amplier. PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
!5 RECEIVE ANTENNA IN [RX ANT IN]
!6 RECEIVE ANTENNA OUT [RX ANT OUT]
Located between the transmit/receive switching cir-
cuit and receivers RF stage. Connects an external unit, such as preamplier or RF lter, using RCA connectors, if desired. In this case, the antenna connector must be se-
lected as ANT 1/R or ANT 2/R. (p. ??) When no external unit is connected, ANT 1 or ANT 2 must be selected. Receiver IN
[RX ANT]
OUT ANT Transmit/Receive switching circuit Transmitter
!7 TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER]
(p. ??) External transverter input/output connector. Activated by voltage applied to [ACC 2] pin 6, or when the transverter function is in use. (p. ??) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 12 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
LCD display
!0
!5
!1
!8
!7
@0
@1
@2 @3
!9 q w e r
@4 t y u i w e o
!0
!1
!2
!3
!4
!3
!2
!6 !5 q S/RF METER (pgs. ??, ??) Shows the signal strength while receiving. Shows the relative output power, SWR, ALC, VD, ID or compression levels while transmitting. A total of 3 meter types are available. Standard meter Edgewise meter Bar meter 13 w IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. ??) Shows the selected IF lter number. e QUICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. ??) Appears when the quick tuning step function is in use. r BAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. ??) Shows the passband width of the IF lter. t SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. ??) Shows the shift frequency of the IF lter. y PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. ??) Graphically displays the passband width for twin PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-
eration. u BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR Appears when the narrow lter (500 Hz or less) is selected during CW, RTTY or PSK operation. i CLOCK READOUT Shows the current time. Local and UTC time can be indicated at the same time. PANEL DESCRIPTION 1
@2 NOTCH INDICATOR (p. ??)
appears when the manual notch function is in use. This function is available in SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK and AM modes.
appears when the auto notch function is in use. This function is available in SSB, AM and FM modes.
@3 APF/TPF INDICATOR
appears when the audio peak lter func-
tion is in use. This function is available in CW mode. (p. ??)
appears when the twin peak lter func-
tion is in use. This function is available in RTTY mode. (p. ??)
@4 DUAL WATCH INDICATOR appears when the dualwatch function is in use. o RTTY TUNING INDICATOR Shows the tuning condition in RTTY mode.
!0 MODE INDICATOR Shows the selected mode.
!1 FREQUENCY READOUTS Shows the operating frequency. Gray characters are used for non-active readout.
!2 MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS
Shows the selected memory channel contents in VFO mode.
Shows the VFO contents in memory mode.
!3 SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. ??) Indicates the displayed memory channel is set as a select memory channel.
!4 MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN Shows the screens for the multi-function digital meter, spectrum scope, voice recorder, memory list, scan, memory keyer, RTTY decoder, PSK decoder, IF lter selection or set modes, etc.
!5 VFO/MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. ??) Indicates the VFO mode or selected memory chan-
nel number.
!6 LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE Indicates the function of the LCD function switches
([F-1] to [F-6]).
!7 MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE Indicates the function of the multi-function switches.
!8 TX INDICATOR Indicates the frequency readout for transmit. appears during an operating frequency is not in an amateur band. When the band edge warning beep is set to OFF (p. ??), does not appear. Appears on the sub band readout when the split func-
tion is turned ON.
!9 RIT INDICATOR appears when RIT function is in use.
@0 TX INDICATOR appears when TX function is in use.
@1 RIT/TX SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR Shows the shift frequency for the RIT or TX func-
tion. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 14 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
Screen menu arrangement The following screens can be selected from the start up screen. Choose the desired screen using the fol-
lowing chart. Pushing [EXIT/SET] several times returns to the start up screen. See p. ?? for set mode arrangement. PSK decoder screen (PSK mode; p. ??) F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-3 Spectrum scope screen (p. ??) Memory list screen (p. ??) Voice recorder screen (p. ??) Scan screen (VFO mode; p. ??) F-4 Memory keyer screen (CW mode; p. ??) Scan screen (Memory mode; p. ??) F-2 F-5 RTTY decoder screen (RTTY mode; p. ??) Set mode menu screen (p. ??) F-3 F-5 F-3 F-6 15 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2
Unpacking After unpacking, immediately report any damage to the delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping cartons. For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-
ment included with the IC-7600, see Supplied acces-
sories on p. ?? of this manual.
Selecting a location Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade-
quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-
ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources. The base of the transceiver has adjustable feet for desktop use. Set the feet to one of two angles depend-
ing on your operating preference.
Grounding To prevent electrical shock, television interference
(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-
lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND terminal on the rear panel. For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap to a long ground rod. Make the distance between the
[GND] terminal and ground as short as possible. R WARNING: NEVER connect the [GND]
terminal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connec-
tion could cause an explosion or electric shock.
[GND]
Antenna connection For radio communications, the antenna is of critical im-
portance, along with output power and receiver sensi-
tivity. Select antenna(s), such as a well-matched 50 antenna, and feedline. We recommend 1.5:1 or better of Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) on your oper-
ating bands. The transmission line should be a coaxial cable. When using a single antenna, use the [ANT1] connec-
tor. CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from lightning by using a lightning arrestor. PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE q 30 mm Slide the coupling ring down. Strip the cable jacket and soft solder. Coupling ring 10 mm (soft solder) w e r 10 mm Soft solder 12 mm solder solder Strip the cable as shown at left. Soft sol-
der the center con-
ductor. Slide the connector body on and solder it. Screw the coupling ring onto the connec-
tor body. 30 mm (98 in)10 mm (38 in)12 mm (116 in) Antenna SWR Each antenna is tuned for a specified frequency range and SWR may be increased out-of-range. When the SWR is higher than approx. 2.0:1, the transceivers power drops to protect the nal tran-
sistors. In this case, an antenna tuner is useful to match the transceiver and antenna. Low SWR allows full power for transmitting. The IC-7600 has an SWR meter to monitor the antenna SWR continuously. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 16 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Required connections D Front panel CW KEY TIMER POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR PHONES BAL NR ELEC-KEY MIC NB NR AF RF/SQL MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY A straight key can be used when the internal electronic keyer is turned OFF in keyer set mode. (p. ??) MICROPHONES (p. ??) HM-36 SM-50 D Rear panel ANTENNA 1, 2 (p. ??)
[Example]:
ANT1 for 1.818 MHz bands ANT 2 for 2128 MHz bands DC POWER SUPPLY (p. ??) PS-126 T X RX SPLIT LOCK SPLIT DUAL WATCH 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 CHANGE GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT TWIN-PBT MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE XFC MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH TS RIT TX CLEAR RIT/ TX SPEECH LOCK 1 ANT 2 DC 13.8V X-VERTER IN OUT ALC SEND 1 2 KEY METER REMOTE EXT-SP RX-ANT ACC TUNER GROUND
(p. ??) Use the heaviest gauge wire or strap available and make the connection as short as possible. Grounding prevents electri-
cal shocks, TVI and other problems. STRAIGHT KEY 17
Advanced connections D Front panel USB-MEMORY HEADPHONES KEYBOARD Connects an USB type PC keyboard directly for RTTY/PSK operation, as well as other text edit operations. TIMER POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR PHONES BAL NR ELEC-KEY MIC NB NR AF RF/SQL INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 T X RX SPLIT LOCK SPLIT DUAL WATCH 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 CHANGE GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT TWIN-PBT MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE XFC MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH TS RIT TX CLEAR RIT/ TX SPEECH LOCK MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY MIC The AFSK modulation signal can also be input to [MIC]. D Rear panel 1 with AH-4 (p. ??) AH-2b or long wire for
[REMOTE] (p. ??) Used computer control and transceive operation. The optional CT-17 is required when connect-
ing a PC to [REMOTE]. ANTENNA 1, 2 (p. ??) Connects a linear amplifier, antenna selector, etc.
[X-VERTER]
Connects a transverter for V/UHF band use. 1 ANT 2 DC 13.8V X-VERTER IN OUT ALC SEND 1 2 KEY METER REMOTE EXT-SP RX-ANT ACC TUNER RX ANT IN/OUT Connects an external preamp or lowpass filter. ACC SOCKETS 1, 2
(pgs. ??, ??) EXTERNAL SPEAKER
(p. ??) RX ANT IN/OUT must be activated in the antenna set screen (p. ??).
[ALC], [SEND] (p. ??) Used for connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier. SP-23
(option) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 18 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS D Rear panel 2 1 ANT 2 DC 13.8V X-VERTER IN OUT ALC SEND 1 2 KEY METER REMOTE EXT-SP RX-ANT ACC TUNER EXTERNAL KEYPAD Connects an external keypad for direct voice memory, keyer memory, RTTY TX memory and PSK TX memory controls. 6.35 (d) mm; 14" plug EXTERNAL KEYPAD 1.5 k 5%
1.5 k 5%
2.2 k 5%
4.7 k 5%
S1
(T1/M1) S2
(T2/M2) S3
(T3/M3) S4
(T4/M4) Mute switch: Mutes both transmis-
sion and reception when switched ON during transceive operation, etc.
[METER]
Connects an external meter, etc. 3.5 (d) mm; 18" plug Output impedance Output voltage (open circuit) : 2.5 V (default)
: 4.7 k Output voltage can be adjusted 0 to 5 V in ACC set mode. (p. ??)
USB connection Connect the USB-Memory* to the USB connector (A type) on the front panel. Unmount operation is recommended before removing the USB-Memory* (p.??). Make sure to connect the USB-Memory correctly. NEVER connect or remove the USB-Memory when the read/write indicator lights or blinks. An USB keyboard* or an USB hub* can also be con-
nected to the USB connector.
* USB-Memory, USB keyboard or USB hub is not supplied by Icom. When the transceiver is connected to PC, an USB cable (third party) should be connected to the USB connector (B type) on the rear panel. (p. ??) or 19
Power supply connections Use a DC power supply with a 23 A capacity when operating the transceiver with AC power. Refer to the diagrams below. INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 CAUTION: Before connecting the DC power cable, check the following important items. Make sure:
The [POWER] switch is OFF. Output voltage of the power source is 1215 V when you use a non-Icom power supply. DC power cable polarity is correct.
: Positive + terminal Red Black : Negative _ terminal CONNECTING PS-126 DC POWER SUPPLY AC outlet PS-126 To DC power socket Transceiver AC cable DC power cable GND CONNECTING A DC POWER SUPPLY AC outlet A DC power supply Transceiver 13.8 V; at least 23 A
+
_ 30 A fuses GND To DC power socket AC cable Red Black Supplied DC power cable
External antenna tuner connection CONNECTING THE AH-4 The AH-4 must be connected to [ANT1]. Coaxial cable (from the AH-4)
[ANT1]
Transceiver GND Control cable GND
[TUNER]
AH-4 Long wire or optional AH-2b 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 20 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Linear amplier connections D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO To an antenna ACC-1 Remote control cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO) ACC cable (supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO) ANT REMOTE Coaxial cable
(supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO) INPUT1 Be sure to connect the cable to the 7-pin ACC 2 jack. INPUT2 Coaxial cable*
EXCITER 1 1&2 Connect
[INPUT2]
if necessary GND GND ANT1 ANT2 ACC 2 REMOTE IC-PW1/EURO Transceiver AC outlet
(Non-European versions : 100120/220240 V European version
: 230 V) GND
*Purchase separately D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplier Transceiver ANT1 To an antenna 50 coaxial cable ALC SEND RF OUTPUT RF INPUT ALC SEND Non-Icom linear amplifier R WARNING:
Set the transceiver output power and linear am-
plier ALC output level after referring to the linear amplier instruction manual. The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to 4 V. The transceiver does not accept positive volt-
age. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings could overheat or damage the linear amplier. The maximum signal level of [SEND] jack is 16 V/0.5 A DC with initial setting, and 250 V/
200 mA with MOSFET setting (see p. ?? for de-
tails). Use an external relay unit if your non-Icom linear amplier requires control voltage and/or cur-
rent greater than specied. 21
Transverter jack information Transverter connector INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2 When 2 to 13.8 V is applied to pin 6 of [ACC 2], the
[X-VERTER] connector is activated for transverter op-
eration and the antenna connectors do not receive or transmit any signals. While receiving, the [X-VERTER] connector can be acti-
vated as an input terminal from an external transverter. While transmitting, the [X-VERTER] connector outputs signals of the displayed frequency at 20 dBm (22 mV) as signals for the external transverter.
FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections To connect a TNC or scan converter, etc., refer to the diagram below. D FSK operation when connecting to [ACC 1]
When using a PC application RTTY OUTPUT GND AUDIO INPUT PTT Connect to serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc. See the instruction manual of the application for details. TNC or scan converter RS-232C RTTY OUTPUT GND AUDIO INPUT PTT RTTY GND AF SEND 2 8 5 7 3 1 4 6 Rear panel view When using a TNC RTTY GND AF SEND 2 8 5 7 3 1 4 6 Rear panel view D AFSK operation When connecting to [ACC 1]
When using a PC application z x c v 2 8 5 7 3 1 4 6 z x c v Audio output GND AF input PTT Connect to serial port, parallel port, speaker jack, microphone jack and line IN/OUT jack, etc. See the instruction manual of the application for details. PC PC b n Rear panel view When connecting to [MIC]
z x c v b n z c x b q w e r t y u i v*
n Rear panel view When using a TNC AFSK output TNC or scan converter RS-232C AF input PTT*
GND SQL input
*When using the VOX function, no need to connect. Refer to the instruction manual of the external equipment (TNC, etc.). When connecting the squelch line, consult the necessary manual (TNC, etc.). D When connecting to the [USB] connector Connect an USB cable (third partys) between the transceivers USB connector [USB] (B) on the rear panel and PC. (p. ??) Icom HP (http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.html) gives the USB driver and the installation guide download service. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
[MIC]
Pin No. FUNCTION DESCRIPTION w e r
+8 V DC output Frequency up Frequency down Squelch open Squelch closed Max. 10 mA Ground Ground through 470 Low level High level CAUTION: DO NOT short pin 2 to ground as this can damage the internal 8 V regulator. DC voltage is applied to pin 1 for microphone operation. Use cau-
tion when using a non-Icom microphone. q UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]
Change the selected readout frequency or memory channel. Pressing a switch continuously changes the frequency or memory channel number continuously. While pushing [XFC], the transmit readout frequency can be controlled while in split frequency operation. The [UP]/[DN] switch can simulate a key paddle. Preset in the keyer set mode. (p. ??) w PTT SWITCH Push and hold to transmit; release to receive. e PTT LOCK SWITCH (available for SM-50 only) Push to toggle between transmit and receive. r LOW CUT SWITCH (available for SM-50 only) Push to cut out the low frequency components of input voice signals. 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS
Microphone connector information
(Front panel view) i Main readout AF output
(varies with [AF]) q Microphone input w +8 V DC output u GND
(Microphone ground) y GND (PTT ground) e Frequency up/down t PTT r Main readout squelch switch
Microphones D HM-36 q w D SM-50
(option) q r w e 23 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2
Accessory connector information ACC 1 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS 2 8 4 1 6 5 7 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RTTY Controls RTTY keying GND Connects to ground. SEND MOD AF SQLS Input/output pin. Goes to ground when transmitting. When grounded, transmits. Modulator input. Connects to a modulator AF detector output. Fixed, regardless of [AF] position in default settings. (see notes below) Squelch output. Goes to ground when squelch opens. 13.8 V 13.8 V output when power is ON. ALC ALC voltage input.
: More than 2.4 V
: Less than 0.6 V
: Less than 2 mA High level Low level Output current Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2.
: 0.5 V to 0.8 V Ground level
: Less than 20 mA Output current Input current (Tx)
: Less than 200 mA Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 3. Input impedance Input level
: 10 k
: Approx. 100 mV rms Output impedance Output level
: 4.7 k
: 100300 mV rms
: Less than 0.3 V/5 mA
: More than 6.0 V/100 A
: Max. 1 A SQL open SQL closed Output current Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7.
: 4 V to 0 V Control voltage
: More than 10 k Input impedance Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5. ACC 2 PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS 2 4 1 6 5 7 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 V Regulated 8 V output. GND SEND BAND ALC TRV 13.8 V Same as ACC 1 pin 2. Same as ACC 1 pin 3. Band voltage output.
(Varies with amateur band) Same as ACC 1 pin 8. Activates [X-VERTER] input/output when HIGH voltage is applied. Same as ACC 1 pin 7. Output voltage Output current
: 8.0 V 0.3 V
: Less than 10 mA Output voltage
: 0 to 8.0 V Input impedance Input voltage
: More than 10 k
: 2 to 13.8 V NOTE: If the CW side tone level limit or beep level limit is in use, the CW side tone or beep tone de-
creases from the xed level when the [AF] control is rotated above a specied level. (p. ??) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 24 3 BASIC OPERATION
Before rst applying power Before first applying power, make sure all connec-
tions required for your system are complete by refer-
ring to Chapter 2.
[BAL]
: 12 oclock
[NR]
: Max. CCW TIMER POWER HF/50MHz TRANSCEIVER TRANSMIT TUNER MONITOR PHONES BAL NR ELEC-KEY MIC NB NR AF RF/SQL
[RF/SQL]
: 12 oclock
[AF]
: Max. CCW After all connections have been done, set controls and switches as shown in the figure below. CW CCW
: Max. clockwise
: Max. counterclockwise T X RX SPLIT LOCK SPLIT DUAL WATCH 1.8 10 21 1 4 7 CHANGE GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT TWIN-PBT MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE XFC MP-W MP-R PBT-CLR NOTCH APF/TPF MW VFO/MEMO NOTCH CW PITCH TS
[NOTCH]
: 12 oclock
[CW PITCH]
: 12 oclock RIT TX CLEAR RIT/ TX SPEECH LOCK MIC GAIN RF POWER BK-IN DELAY KEY SPEED F-1 SSB F-2 CW F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 RTTY/PSK AM/FM FILTER EXIT/SET AUTO TUNE REC PLAY VOICE MEMORY
[MIC GAIN]
: 12 oclock
[RF POWER]
: Max. CW
[BK-IN DELAY]
: 12 oclock
[KEY SPEED]
: 1012 oclock
Applying power (CPU resetting) First applying power:
Reset the transceiver using the following procedure. Resetting CLEARS all programmed contents in memory channels and returns programmed values in set mode to default values. q Make sure the transceiver power is OFF. w While pushing and holding [F-INP ENT] and [MW], push [POWER] to turn power ON. The CPU is reset. The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec. The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies when resetting is complete. e Change the set mode settings after resetting, if desired. Normal applying power:
Push [POWER] to turn power ON, then check the dis-
play. When any of indicators appear, turn them OFF if necessary. (See the appropriate page for details.) POWER MW F-INP ENT In cooler temperatures, the LCD may appear dark and unstable after turning power ON. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate any equipment malfunc-
tion. 25 BASIC OPERATION 3 VFO/MEMO
Selecting VFO/memory mode
Push [VFO/MEMO] to switch between VFO and memory modes. VFO appears when in VFO mode, or the selected memory channel number appears when in memory mode. Pushing and holding [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. transfers the contents of the selected memory channel to VFO mode. (p. ??) VFO indicator Memory channel number
Main/Sub band selection The IC-7600 has 2 identical receivers, main and sub. The main band is displayed on the left hand side, and the sub band is displayed on the right hand side of the LCD. Some functions can only be applied to the selected band and transmission occurs on the main band (except during split frequency operation). MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE M.SCOPE
Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] to select access to the main or sub readout. The selected readout frequency is displayed clearly. The sub readout functions only during split operation or dualwatch. MAIN VFO SUB VFO MAIN VFO SUB VFO Access to MAIN VFO Access to SUB VFO D Main/Sub band switching
Push [CHANGE] to switch the frequency and selected memory channel between main and sub readouts. Switches between transmit frequency and receive fre-
quency when the split frequency function is ON. (p. ??) D Main/Sub band equalization
Push and hold [CHANGE] for 1 sec. to equalizes the sub readout frequency to the main readout fre-
quency. CHANGE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 26 3 BASIC OPERATION
Selecting an operating band The triple band stacking register provides 3 memories for each band key, storing frequency and mode infor-
mation. This function is convenient when you operate 3 oper-
ating modes on one band. For example, one register is used for a CW frequency, another for a SSB fre-
quency and the other one for a RTTY frequency. If a band key is pushed once, the frequency and oper-
ating mode last used are called up. When the key is pushed again, another stored frequency and operat-
ing mode are called up. See the table below for a list of the bands available and the default settings for each band. Band keys BAND 1.8 MHz 3.5 MHz 7 MHz 10 MHz 14 MHz 18 MHz 21 MHz 24 MHz 28 MHz 50 MHz General REGISTER 1 1.900000 MHz CW 3.550000 MHz LSB 7.050000 MHz LSB 10.120000 MHz CW 14.100000 MHz USB 18.100000 MHz USB 21.200000 MHz USB 24.950000 MHz USB 28.500000 MHz USB 50.100000 MHz USB 15.000000 MHz USB REGISTER 2 1.910000 MHz CW 3.560000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 10.130000 MHz CW 14.200000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 21.300000 MHz USB 24.980000 MHz USB 29.500000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB REGISTER 3 1.915000 MHz CW 3.580000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW 14.050000 MHz CW 18.150000 MHz USB 21.050000 MHz CW 24.900000 MHz CW 28.100000 MHz CW 51.000000 MHz FM 15.200000 MHz USB D Using the band stacking registers
[Example]: 14 MHz band q Push [14 5], then select a frequency and an oper-
ating mode. A frequency and an operating mode are memorized in the first band stacking register. w Push [14 5] again, then select another frequency and operating mode. This frequency and operating mode are memorized in the second band stacking register. e Push [14 5] again, then select another frequency and operating mode. This frequency and operating mode are memorized in the third band stacking register. When a fourth frequency and operating mode are selected on a band, the first register set in step q, is over written. 1 4 7 1.8 10 21 GENE 3.5 14 24 50 2 5 8 0 7 18 28 3 6 9 F-INP ENT 27
Frequency setting The transceiver has several tuning methods for con-
venient frequency tuning. D Tuning with the main dial q Push the desired band key on the keypad 13 times. 3 different frequencies can be selected on each band with the band key. (See previous page Using the band stacking registers.) w Rotate the main dial to set the desired frequency. If the dial lock function is activated, the lock indica-
tor lights, and the main dial does not function. In this case, push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to deactivate the lock function. When LOCK/SPEECH is selected in [SPEECH/
LOCK] Switch item in others set mode, pushing
[SPEECH/LOCK] deactivates the lock function.
(see p. ?? for details) D Direct frequency entry with the keypad The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency entry as described below. q Push [F-INP ENT]. indicator appears. w Input the desired frequency. Push [GENE ] to input . (decimal point) between the MHz units and kHz units. e Push [F-INP ENT] to set the input frequency. To cancel the input, push any other key instead of
[F-INP ENT] or keypad. BASIC OPERATION 3 Band keys Main dial Keypad
[EXAMPLE]
14.025 MHz F-INP ENT 1.8 1 18.0725 MHz 1.8 1 F-INP ENT 10 4 GEN 50 0 3.5 2 14 5 F-INP ENT 24 8 GEN 50 0 21 7 3.5 2 14 5 F-INP ENT 706 kHz F-INP ENT GEN 21 7 50 0 18 6 F-INP ENT 5.100 MHz F-INP ENT 14 5 GEN 1.8 1 F-INP ENT 7.000 MHz F-INP ENT 21 7 F-INP ENT 21.280 MHz 21.245 MHz 10 4 F-INP ENT GEN 3.5 2 14 5 F-INP ENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 28 3 BASIC OPERATION D About 5 MHz band operation (USA version only) Operation on the 5 MHz band is allowed on 5 discrete frequencies and must adhere to the following:
USB mode Maximum of 50 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power) 2.8 kHz bandwidth Its your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-
mission in this band meets the stringent conditions under which amateur operations may use these fre-
quencies. NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-
quencies, mode and filter settings into memory channels for easy recall.
* The FCC specifies center frequencies on the 5 MHz band. However, the IC-7600 displays car-
rier frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to 1.5 kHz below the specified FCC channel center frequency. D Quick tuning step The operating frequency can be changed in larger steps (0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 or 25 kHz selectable) for quick tuning. q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON. Z appears when the quick tuning function is ON. w Rotate the main dial to change the frequency in programmed kHz steps. e Push [TS] again to turn the quick tuning function OFF. Z disappears. r Rotate the main dial for normal tuning if desired. D Selecting kHz step q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function ON. w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to enter quick tuning Z appears when the quick tuning function ON. step set mode. Selected tuning steps for all modes appear. e Select the desired operating mode. r Rotate the main dial to select the desired tuning step. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to return to the default setting, if desired. t Repeat steps e and r to select quick tuning steps for other modes, if desired. y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the setting display. NOTE: When entering quick tuning step set mode, the quick tuning function must be activated first. The main and sub bands have independent tuning step settings. 29 IC-7600 Displayed Frequency*
5.33050 MHz 5.34650 MHz 5.36650 MHz 5.37150 MHz 5.40350 MHz FCC Channel Center Frequency*
5.33200 MHz 5.34800 MHz 5.36800 MHz 5.37300 MHz 5.40500 MHz To assist you in operating the 5 MHz band within the rules specified by the FCC, transmission is illegal on any 5 MHz band frequency other than the five frequencies indicated in the table above. TS Quick tuning indicator Main dial DEF F-4 TS Mode selection EXIT/SET Main dial D Selecting 1 Hz step A minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for fine tuning. q Push [TS] to turn the quick tuning function OFF. w Push and hold [TS] for 1 sec. to turn the 1 Hz tun-
ing step ON and OFF. NOTE:
RIT and/or TX also functions in 1 Hz tuning step when used. The frequency is changed in 50 Hz step when the
[UP]/[DN] switches of the microphone are used for the frequency setting (when the programma-
ble tuning step is not selected.) D Auto tuning step function When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning speed accelerates automatically as selected. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects set mode menu screen. e Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode. r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select MAIN DIAL Auto TS. t Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition from HIGH, LOW and OFF. HIGH : Approx. 5 times faster when the tun-
ing step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps;
approx. 2 times faster when the tuning step is set to 5 kHz or larger steps. LOW : Approx. 2 times faster OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF. y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode. D 14 tuning step function When operating in SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK, the 14 tuning function is available. Dial rotation is reduced to 14 of normal speed when the 14 tuning function is ON for finer tuning control.
Push [1/4] (MF7) to toggle the 14 tuning function ON and OFF. appears when the 14 tuning function is ON. BASIC OPERATION 3 TS 1 Hz step indicator OTHERS F-5 SET F-6 F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial HIGH (default) 1 4 tuning step OFF tuning step ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 30 3 BASIC OPERATION D Band edge warning beep When you tune outside of an amateur bands fre-
quency range, a warning beep sounds. This function can be turned OFF in set mode, if desired. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects set mode menu screen. e Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode. r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select Beep (Band Edge). t Rotate the main dial to select the band edge warn-
ing beep function. y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode. The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. ??) When the band edge warning beep is set to ON:
The band edge warning beep is activated according to the set mode setting as follows. ON (Default) Band edge beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits a default amateur band. (default) ON (User) A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits an amateur band that is set in band edge screen. ON (User) & TX Limit A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits an amateur band that is set in band edge screen and transmission is limited out of the band. To programming the band edge:
When ON (User) or ON (User) & TX Limit is selected, [BAND] appears in the display above the function switch (F-5), and up to 30 band edge fre-
quencies can be set in band edge screen. q Push [BAND] (F-5) to enter the band edge screen. w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired band edge. Push [ ] (F-3) to select the set content for band edge, lower or upper. Push [INS] (MF6) to insert a new blank band edge line. Push and hold [DEL] (MF7) for 1 sec. to delete the selected band edge line. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to display the band edge initialize screen. Then, push and hold
[OK] (F-5) to initialize all band edge frequency settings. e Input the desired frequency with the keypad. Push [GENE ] to input . (decimal point) between the MHz units and kHz units. Program the frequency in ascending order. The frequency that is duplicated or out of an amateur band cannot be programmed. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode. 31 OTHERS F-5 SET F-6 F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial ON (Default) (default) ON (User) BAND OTHERS
[DEL]
[INS]
F-5 SET F-6 F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 DEF EXIT/SET
[DIAL]
Band edge screen NOTE: All 30 band edge frequencies are set in default. So you should delete a one of band edges before programming. BASIC OPERATION 3 USB-D1 USB-D2 USB-D3 Mode switches SSB USB LSB CW CW CW-R RTTY/PSK LSB-D1 LSB-D2 LSB-D3 RTTY-R RTTY PSK PSK-R AM-D1 AM-D2 AM-D3 AM/FM AM FM FM-D1 FM-D2 FM-D3
: Push mode switch momentary.
: Push and hold mode switch for 1 sec.
Operating mode selection SSB (USB/LSB), SSB data (USB data/LSB data), CW, CW reverse (CW-R), RTTY, RTTY reverse
(RTTY-R), PSK, PSK reverse (PSK-R), AM, AM data, FM and FM data modes are available in the IC-7600. Push the desired mode switch momentarily to select a mode of operation. See the diagram as at right for the order of selection. Microphone signals are muted when data mode is selected. Selecting SSB mode
Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB. USB is selected first when above 10 MHz; or LSB is selected first when below 10 MHz operation. After USB or LSB is selected, push [SSB] to toggle between USB and LSB. After USB or LSB is selected, push and hold [SSB] for 1 sec. to select USB or LSB data mode, respectively. After USB or LSB data mode is selected, push and hold
[SSB] for 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3, in sequence. In USB or LSB data mode, push [SSB] to return to USB or LSB mode, respectively. Selecting CW mode
Push [CW] to select CW. After CW is selected, push [CW] to toggle between CW and CW reverse mode. Selecting RTTY/PSK mode
Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY or PSK. After RTTY or PSK is selected, push [RTTY/PSK] to toggle between RTTY and PSK. After RTTY or PSK is selected, push and hold
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY reverse, or, PSK and PSK reverse mode, respectively. Selecting AM/FM mode
Push [AM/FM] to select AM or FM. After AM or FM is selected, push [AM/FM] to toggle between AM and FM. After AM or FM is selected, push and hold [AM/FM] for 1 sec. to select AM or FM data mode, respectively. After AM or FM data mode is selected, push and hold [AM/FM] for 1 sec. to select data 1, 2 and 3, in sequence. In AM or FM data mode, push [AM/FM] to return to AM or FM mode, respectively. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 32 3 BASIC OPERATION
Squelch and receive (RF) sensitivity Adjusts the RF gain and squelch threshold level. The squelch removes noise output from the speaker
(closed position) when no signal is received. The squelch is particularly effective for AM and FM. It is also available for other modes. 12 to 1 oclock position is recommended for any setting of the [RF/SQL] control. The control can be set as Auto (RF gain control in SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK; squelch control in AM and FM) or squelch control (RF gain is fixed at maximum) in set mode as follows. (p. ??)
[RF/SQL]
SET MODE RF+SQL
(default) SQL AUTO OPERATION Can be used in all modes. Functions as noise squelch or S-meter squelch in FM modes; S-meter squelch only in other modes. Operates as a squelch control. RF gain is fixed at maximum sensitivity. Operates as an RF gain control in SSB, CW, RTTY and PSK modes. Squelch is fixed open. Operates as a squelch control in AM and FM modes. RF gain is fixed at maximum sensitivity.
Adjusting RF gain (Receive sensitivity) Normally, [RF/SQL] is set to the 11 oclock position. Rotate [RF/SQL] to the 11 oclock position for maxi-
mum sensitivity. Rotating counterclockwise from the maximum position reduces sensitivity. The S-meter indicates receive sensitivity.
Adjusting squelch (Removing non-signal noise) Rotate [RF/SQL] clockwise when receiving no signal, until the noise just disappears.
[RX] indicator light goes out. Rotating [RF/SQL] past the threshold point invokes the S-
meter squelch this allows you to set a minimum signal level needed to open the squelch. When setting as RF gain/squelch control Squelch is open. RF gain adjustable range Noise squelch (FM mode) Recommended level Maximum RF gain S-meter squelch When functioning as RF gain control
(Squelch is fixed open; SSB, CW, RTTY only) Adjustable range Minimum RF gain Maximum RF gain When functioning as squelch control
(RF gain is fixed at maximum.) Noise squelch (FM mode) Noise squelch threshold
(FM mode) Squelch is open. S-meter squelch threshold S-meter squelch Shallow Deep While rotating the RF gain control, noise may be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction. 33 BASIC OPERATION 3
Volume setting
Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease the audio output level. Increases Decreases
[AF]
Meter indication selection The transceiver has 6 transmit meter functions for your convenience.
Push [METER] (MF2) several times to select the desired meter. Indicates the RF output power in watts. Indicates the SWR on the transmission line. METER Indicates the ALC level. When the meter movement shows the input signal level exceeds the allowable level, the ALC limits the RF power. In such cases, reduce the [MIC GAIN] control. Indicates the compression level when the speech compressor is in use. Indicates the drain current of the final amplifier MOSFETs. Indicates the drain terminal voltage of the final amplifier MOSFETs. SWR readout ALC level readout D Multi-function digital meter The IC-7600 can display the multi-function digital meter on the LCD display. This meter displays all transmit parameters simultaneously. q Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to turn the multi-function digital meter ON. w Push [P-HOLD] (F-1) to toggle the peak level hold function ON. P-HOLD appears on the window title when the peak level hold function is ON. e Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec., or push
[EXIT/SET] to turn the multi-function digital meter OFF. METER F-1 P-HOLD P-HOLD indicator 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 34 3 BASIC OPERATION D Meter type selection A total of 3 meter types are available in the IC-7600 Standard, Edgewise and Bar meters. Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec-
tion. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to normal screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6), then push [DISP] (F-3) to select display set mode. e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select Meter type
(Normal Screen) item. r Rotate the main dial to select the desired meter type from Standard, Edgewise and Bar. t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit display set mode. DISP F-3 SET F-6 F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial Edgewise meter Bar meter
Voice synthesizer operation The IC-7600 has a built-in voice synthesizer to announce the operating frequency, mode* and S-
meter* in clear, electronically-generated voice, in English (or Japanese). Select the desired parameters to be announced, such as audio level, speed, language, contents, in the set mode in advance. (pgs. ??, ??)
Push [SPEECH/LOCK] to announce the currently selected frequency and S-meter level*.
Push a mode switch to announce the appropriate mode*.
* The S-meter level and operating mode announcements can be deactivated, respectively. (pgs. ??, ??) NOTE: When LOCK/SPEECH is selected in
[[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch] item in others set mode, pushing and holding [SPEECH/LOCK] activates the voice synthesizer. (p. ??) 35 SPEECH LOCK BASIC OPERATION 3
Basic transmit operation Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure transmitting wont cause interference to other stations on the same frequency. Its good amateur practice to listen first, and then, even if nothing is heard, ask Is the frequency in use? once or twice, before you begin operating on that frequency. D Transmitting Before transmitting, monitor your selected operat-
ing frequency to make sure transmitting wont cause interference to other stations on the same frequency. q Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone) to trans-
mit. The [TX] indicator lights red. w Push [TRANSMIT] again or release [PTT] (micro-
phone) to return to receive.
Adjusting the transmit output power
Rotate [RF POWER]. Adjustable range : 2 W to 100 W
(AM mode: 1 W to 30 W) Increases max. 100 W
(30 W for AM) Decreases min. 2 W
(1 W for AM) Push D Microphone gain adjustment Before transmitting, monitor your selected operat-
ing frequency to make sure transmitting wont cause interference to other stations on the same frequency. q Push [SSB] to select SSB mode. w Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter. e Push [PTT] (microphone) to transmit. r While talking into the microphone, rotate
[MIC GAIN] so that the ALC meter reading doesnt go outside the ALC zone. (see at right) Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level. Increases Push Decreases t Release [PTT] (microphone) to return to receive. In addition, the transceiver can display the multi-func-
tion digital meter in the LCD, which displays all trans-
mit meters simultaneously. TRANSMIT
[TX] indicator
[RF POWER]
METER
[MIC GAIN]
SSB ALC zone 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 36 3 BASIC OPERATION D Drive gain adjustment The drive gain is active for all modes other than SSB mode with speech compressor OFF. Before transmitting, monitor your selected operat-
ing frequency to make sure transmitting wont cause interference to other stations on the same frequency. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to normal screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6), then push [LEVEL] (F-1) to select level set mode. e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select Drive Gain item. r Push [METER] (MF2) to select the ALC meter. t Push [PTT] (microphone; SSB with [COMP] ON, AM or FM), key down (CW) or push [TRANSMIT]
(RTTY or PSK) to transmit. y While talking into the microphone or keying down, rotate the main dial so that the ALC meter reading is within 30% to 50% of the ALC scale. (p. ??) Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level. u Release [PTT], stop keying or push [TRANSMIT]
again to return to receive. i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit display set mode. TRANSMIT METER SET F-6 F-1 LEVEL /
F-2 EXIT/SET Main dial Drive gain range 37 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
Functions for CW operation D About CW reverse mode CW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side band to receive CW signals. Use when interfering signals are near a desired sig-
nal and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interfer-
ence.
During CW mode, push [CW] to select CW and CW-R mode. D About CW pitch control The received CW audio pitch and CW side tone can be adjusted to suit your preference (from 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps). This does not change the operating frequency.
Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference. Adjustable within 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps. Push Interference BFO Desired signal BFO Interference Desired signal CW mode (LSB side) CW-R mode (USB side)
[CW PITCH]
Higher frequency The filter set screen graphically displays the CW pitch operations. (See at right.) Lower frequency D CW side tone function When the transceiver is in receive (and the break-in function is OFF p. ??) you can listen to the CW side tone without actually transmitting. This allows you to match your transmit frequency exactly to another stations by matching the audio tone. You can also use the CW side tone (be sure to turn OFF break-in!) to practice CW sending. CW side tone level can be adjusted in level set mode
(p. ??). q Push [SET] (F-6), then push [LEVEL] (F-1) to select level set mode. w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select Side Tone Level item. e Rotate the main dial to adjust the side tone level. Side tone level is adjustable within 0 to 100 % in 1%
steps. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit display set mode. Matching the frequency of a transmitted and received signal is called Zero beat. F-1 LEVEL /
F-2 F-6 SET EXIT/SET Main dial 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 38 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation The APF changes the audio frequency response by boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired CW signal. q During CW mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the audio peak filter ON and OFF. appears in the display and the indicator on this switch lights green when the audio peak filter is ON. w Push and hold [APF/TPF] for 1 sec. several times to select the desired audio filter width. WIDE, MID and NAR filters, or 320, 160 and 80 Hz fil-
ters are available depending on APF type setting in other set mode. (p. ??) The audio filter shape is also selectable from SOFT and SHARP in others set mode (p. ??). APF/TPF 39 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
Electronic keyer functions The IC-7600 has a number of convenient functions for the built-in electronic keyer that can be accessed from the memory keyer menu. q During CW mode, push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to normal screen, if necessary. w Push [KEYER] (F-3) to select memory keyer screen. e Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu screen. r Push [SEND] (F-1), [EDIT] (F-2), [001] (F-3) or
[CW KEY] (F-4) to select the desired menu. See the diagram below. Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous display. KEYER /
F-3 001 F-1 SEND F-2 EDIT F-4 EXIT/SET CW KEY F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 Memory keyer screen (p. ??) Memory keyer edit screen (p. ??) Memory keyer menu screen Contest number set mode (p. ??) EXIT/SET F-1 F-2 F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-3 Keyer set mode screen (p. ??) F-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 40 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Memory keyer screen Pre-set characters can be sent using the keyer send menu. Contents of the memory keyer are set using the edit menu. Transmitting q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3) to select memory keyer screen. w Push [TRANSMIT] to set the transceiver to trans-
mit, or set the break-in function ON (p. ??). e Push one of the function keys ([M1] (F-1) to [M4]
(F-4)) to send the contents of the memory keyer. Pushing and holding a function key for 1 sec. or push
[REPEAT] (F-6) while sending the contents of the memory keyer to send the contents repeatedly; push any function key except for to cancel the transmission. The contest serial number counter counts each time the contents are sent. Push [1] (F-5) to reduce the contest serial number count by 1 before sending the contents of the memory keyer to a station a second time. M1M4 are highlighted while transmitting. appears while transmitting repeatedly. Set the repeat interval of the memory keyer to 160 sec. (1 sec. steps). See p. ?? for keyer set mode. r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to normal screen. For your information When an external keypad is connected to [KEY] con-
nector on the rear panel, or one of [F-1][F-4] key of the keyboard that is connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the front panel is pushed, the pro-
grammed contents, M1M4, can be transmitted without selecting the memory keyer screen. See pgs. ??, ?? for details. TRANSMIT KEYER F-3 1 F-5 F-1 M1 F-4 M4 EXIT/SET Memory keyer screen 41 D Editing a memory keyer The contents of the memory keyer memories can be set using the memory keyer edit menu. The memory keyer can memorize and re-transmit 4 CW key codes for often-used CW sentences, contest serial numbers, etc. Total capacity of the memory keyer is 70 charac-
ters per memory channel. Programming contents q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3) to select memory keyer screen. w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu, then push [EDIT] (F-2) to select keyer edit screen. Memory keyer contents of Channel 1 (M1) is selected. e Push [M1..M4] (F-6) several times to select the desired memory keyer channel to be edited. r Push [ABC] (MF6) or [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character, or push the key-
pad for number input.
[Symbol] appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when 123 character group is selected. Selectable characters (using the main dial);
Key selection Characters RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 M1..M4 F-6 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET EDIT KEYER 123 Symbol ABC F-1 F-2 F-3 DEL F-4 SPACE Main dial A to Z (capital letters) Memory keyer edit screen 0 to 9 (numbers)
/ ? ^ . , @ NOTE:
^ is used to transmit a string of characters with no inter-character space. Put ^ before a text string such as ^AR, and the string AR is sent with no space.
is used to insert the CW contest serial num-
ber. The serial number automatically increments by 1. This function is available only for one memory keyer channel at a time. Memory keyer channel M2 used by default. t Push [] (F-1) or [] (F-2) to move the cursor backwards or forwards, respectively. Pushing [DEL] (F-3) deletes a character and [SPACE]
(F-4) inserts a space. y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-
acters. u Push [EXIT/SET] twice to return to normal screen.
For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] (A) con-
nector on the front panel, the memory keyer contents can also be edited from the keyboard. Example entered QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST into memory keyer channel 3 Pre-programmed contents Contents CH M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST M2 UR 5NN BK M3 CFM TU M4 QRZ?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 42 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Contest number set mode This menu is used to set the contest (serial) number and count-up trigger, etc. Setting contents q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3) to select memory keyer screen. w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu, then push [001] (F-3) to select contest serial num-
ber set mode. e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set item. r Set the desired condition using the main dial. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default condition or value. t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to normal screen. Contest number set mode screen KEYER
/
F-3 001 F-1 F-2 F-4 DEF EXIT/SET Main dial Number Style This item sets the numbering system used for con-
test (serial) numbers normal or short morse num-
bers. Short morse numbers are also referred to as cut numbers. Normal Normal
: Does not use short morse numbers
(default) 190ANO : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O. 190ANT : Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T. 90 NO : Sets 9 as N and 0 as O. 90 NT : Sets 9 as N and 0 as T. Count Up Trigger This selects which of the four memories will con-
tain the contest serial number exchange. The count-up trigger allows the serial number to auto-
matically increment after each complete serial num-
ber exchange is sent. M2 M1, M2, M3 and M4 can be set. (default: M2) Present Number This item shows the current number for the count-up trigger channel set above. 001 Rotate the main dial to change the number, or push and hold [001CLR] (F-4) for 1 sec. to reset the current number to 001. 43 D Keyer set mode This set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat time, dash weight, paddle specifications, keyer type, etc. Setting contents q During CW mode operation, push [KEYER] (F-3) to select memory keyer screen. w Push [EXIT/SET] to select memory keyer menu, then push [CW KEY] (F-4) to select keyer set mode. e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set item. r Set the desired condition using the main dial. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default condition or value. t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to normal screen. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 DEF CW KEY
/
F-4 F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial KEYER Keyer set mode screen Keyer Repeat Time When sending CW using the repeat timer, this item sets the time between transmission. 2s 1 to 60 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be selected.
(default: 2 sec.) M2 1:1:2.8 to 1:1:4.5 (in 0.1 steps) can be selected.
(default: 1:1:3.0) Dot/Dash Ratio This item sets the dot/dash ratio. Keying weight example: Morse code K Weight setting:
1:1:3 (default) DOT (fixed*) DASH DASH Weight setting:
Adjusted Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)
*SPACE and DOT length can be adjusted with [KEY SPEED] only. Rise Time This item sets the rise time of the transmitted CW envelope. 4ms 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 msec. can be selected.
(default: 4 msec.) About rise time Key action Tx Rx Tx output power Set Tx power level 0 Rise time Time Key clicks on nearby frequencies can be generated if the rise time of a CW waveform is too short. Continues to the next page. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 44 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Keyer set mode (continued) Paddle Polarity This item sets the paddle dot-dash polarity. Normal Normal and reverse polarity can be selected. Keyer Type This item selects the keyer type for [ELEC-KEY]
connector on the front panel. ELE-KEY ELEC-KEY, BUG-KEY and Straight key can be selected. (default: ELEC-KEY) Mic Up/Down Keyer This item allows you to set the microphone [UP]/
[DN] keys to be used as a paddle. OFF ON : [UP]/[DN] keys can be used for CW. OFF : [UP]/[DN] keys cannot be used for CW. NOTE: When ON is selected, the frequency and memory channel cannot be changed using the [UP]/[DN] keys. 45
RTTY (FSK) operation A DSP-based high-quality Baudot RTTY encoder/
decoder is built-in to the IC-7600. When connecting a PC keyboard (p. ??), RTTY operation can be per-
formed without an external RTTY terminal, TNC or PC. If you would rather use your RTTY terminal or TNC, consult the manual that comes with the RTTY termi-
nal or TNC. q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY. After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes. RTTY or RTTY-R appears. e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode screen. The IC-7600 has a built-in Baudot decoder. r To tune the desired signal, aim for a symmetrical waveform and ensure the peak points align with the mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz) frequency lines in the FFT scope. The S-meter indicates received signal strength when signal is received. t Press [F12] on the connected PCs keyboard to transmit.
[TX] indicator lights red. y Type from the keyboard to enter the contents that you want to transmit. The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer screen and transmitted immediately. The text color will be changed when transmitted. Press one of [F1][F8] on the keyboard to transmit the TX memory contents. u Press [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.
For your convenience The transmission contents can be typed before being transmitted. q Perform the steps q to r above. w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the message that you want to transmit. The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer screen. e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit the typewritten contents. The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will be changed when transmitted. To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice. r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
[TX]
[RX]
DECODE indicator indicator F-3 Band keys
[AF]
RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET Main dial Appears TX buffer screen FFT scope RX contents screen 2125/170 Water-fall 1905 2515 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 46 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D About RTTY reverse mode Received characters are occasionally garbled when the received signal is reversed between Mark and Space tones. This reversal can be caused by incor-
rect TNC connections, setting, commands, etc. To receive a reversed RTTY signals correctly, select RTTY-R (RTTY Reverse) mode. Normal Reverse 170 Hz 2125 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz
During RTTY mode, push and hold [RTTY/PSK]
for 1 sec. to select RTTY and RTTY-R mode. Check the received signal. Space Mark BFO BFO Space Mark D Twin peak lter The twin peak filter changes the audio frequency response by boosting the mark and space frequen-
cies (2125 and 2295 Hz) for better reception of RTTY signals.
During RTTY mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the twin peak filter ON and OFF. appears in the LCD and the indicator on this switch lights green while the filter is in use. NOTE: When the twin peak filter is in use, the received audio output may increase. This is a nor-
mal, not a malfunction. APF/TPF 47 D Functions for the RTTY decoder indication q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY. After RTTY mode is selected, push and hold [RTTY/
PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between RTTY and RTTY-R modes. RTTY or RTTY-R appears. e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode screen. When tuned into an RTTY signal, decoded characters are displayed in the RX contents screen. r Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) to freeze the current screen. Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) again to cancel the function. t Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the RTTY decode appears while the function is in use. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 DECODE F-3 WIDE F-6 Band keys F-2 RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET HOLD/CLR screen size from normal and wide. S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be selected in display set mode. (pgs. ??, ??) y Push and hold [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) for 1 sec. to clear the displayed characters. indicator disappears at the same time when the hold function is in use. u Push [EXIT/SET] to close the RTTY decode screen. Wide screen indication D Setting the decoder threshold level Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some characters are displayed when no signal is received. q Select the RTTY decode screen as described above. w Push [ADJ] (F-4) to select the threshold level set-
ting condition. e Rotate the main dial to adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level. Push and hold [DEF] (F-5) for 1 sec. to select the default setting. r Push [ADJ] (F-4) to exit from the threshold level setting condition. The UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new line code can be set in the RTTY set mode.
(p. ??) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 48 DECODE
/
F-3 TX MEM 14/58 F-6 F-1 RT1 F-4 RT4 or F-1 RT5 F-4 RT8 DECODE
/
F-3 TX MEM RT1..RT8 F-6 F-5 EDIT /
AUTO TX EXIT/SET 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D RTTY memory transmission Pre-set characters can be sent using the RTTY mem-
ory. Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu. q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select RTTY decode screen. w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory screen. e Push [14/58] (F-6) to select memory bank then push one of the function keys ([RT1] (F-1) to
[RT4] (F-4) or [RT5] (F-1) to [RT8] (F-4)). When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory contents will be transmitted immediately. When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents will be transmitted immediately when function key is pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected keyboard is pressed, depending on auto transmission/
reception setting (see below). The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on setting. D Automatic transmission/reception setting q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select RTTY decode screen. w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select RTTY memory edit screen. RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is selected. e Push [RT1..RT8] (F-6) several times to select the desired RTTY memory. r Push [AUTO TX] (F-5) several times to select the AUTO TX desired condition as follow. AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the selected memory and returns to receive after the transmission.
: Automatically transmits the selected memory. To return to receive, press [F12] on the key-
board.
: Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory. Automatically returns to receive after the transmission. AUTO RX No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory and press [F12] again to return to receive. t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit RTTY memory edit condi-
tion. NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the AUTO TX/RX setting when no keyboard is con-
nected. 49 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 DECODE
/
F-3 TX MEM RT1..RT8 F-6 F-5 EDIT EXIT/SET 123 Symbol ABC D Editing RTTY memory The contents of the RTTY memories can be set using the memory edit menu. The memory can store and re-transmit 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY information. Total capacity of the memory is 70 char-
acters per memory channel. Programming contents q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select RTTY decode screen. w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select RTTY memory screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select RTTY memory edit screen. RTTY memory contents of the Channel 1 (RT1) is selected. e Push [RT1..RT8] (F-6) several times to select the desired RTTY memory channel to be edited. r Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character, or push the keypad for number input.
[Symbol] (MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when 123 character group is selected. Selectable characters (using the main dial);
Key selection Characters A to Z (capital letters) 0 to 9 (numbers)
! $ & ? " / . , : ; ( ) F-1 F-2 F-3 DEL F-4 SPACE Main dial RTTY memory edit screen t Push [] (F-1) or [] (F-2) to move the cursor backwards or forwards, respectively. Pushing [DEL] (F-3) deletes a character and [SPACE]
(F-4) inserts a space. y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-
acters. u Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and exit RTTY memory edit screen.
For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the RTTY memory con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard. Pre-programmed contents CH RT1 RT2 RT3 RT4 RT5 RT6 RT7 RT8 Contents DE ICOM ICOM K DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K QSL UR 599599 BK QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599599 BK 73 GL SK CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC7600 & ANTENNA IS A 3ELEMENT TRIBAND YAGI. MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS INTERNAL FSK UNIT & DEMODULATOR OF THE IC7600. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 50 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D RTTY decode set mode This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-
tion, time stamp setting, etc. Setting contents q During RTTY mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select RTTY decode screen. w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the second RTTY decode menu, then push [SET] (F-5) to select RTTY decode set mode. Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen size from nor-
mal and wide. e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set item. r Set the desired condition using the main dial. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default condition or value. Push [ ] (F-3) to select the set contents for some items. t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode. F-1 F-2 F-3 DEF F-4 SET WIDE F-6 F-5 F-1 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial
<MENU1>
DECODE RTTY decode set mode screen RTTY FFT Scope Averaging Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF) OFF Recommendation!
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, use of the default or smaller averaging setting is recom-
mended. RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color Set the color for the FFT scope waveform. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 51 255 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 153 RTTY Decode USOS Turn the capability of letter code decoding after receiving a space (USOS; UnShift On Space func-
tion) ON and OFF. ON ON : Decode as letter code. OFF : Decode as character code. RTTY Docode New Line Code Selects the new line code of the internal RTTY decoder. CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed CR,LF,CR+LF CR,LF,CR+LF : Makes new line with any codes. CR+LF
: Makes new line with CR+LF code only. RTTY Diddle Selects the diddle condition. 51 BLANK OFF BLANK : Transmits blank code during no code
: Turns the diddle function OFF. LTRS transmission.
: Transmits letter code during no code transmission. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 RTTY TX USOS Explicitly inserts the FIGS character even though it is not required by the receiving station. ON ON : Inserts FIGS. OFF : Does not insert FIGS. RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX Selects the automatic new line code (CR+LF) trans-
mission capability. ON ON : Transmits CR+LF code once. OFF : Transmits no CR+LF code. RTTY Time Stamp Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception time) indication ON and OFF. ON ON : Displays the time stamp. OFF : No time stamp indication. RTTY Time Stamp (Time) Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage. NOTE: The time wont be displayed when OFF is selected in RTTY Time Stamp as above. Local Local : Selects the time that set in Time (Now). UTC* : Selects the time that set in CLOCK2.
* The name of choice may differ according to CLOCK2 Name setting (p. ??). UTC is the default name of CLOCK2. RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency) Selects the operating frequency indication for time stamp usage. OFF ON : Displays the operating frequency. OFF : No operating frequency display. NOTE: The frequency wont be displayed when OFF is selected in RTTY Time Stamp as above. RTTY Font Color (Receive) Set the text color for received characters. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. RTTY Font Color (Transmit) Set the text color for transmitted characters. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp) Set the text color for time stamp indication. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer) Set the text color in the TX buffer screen. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 128 128 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 255 255 106 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 106 0 189 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 155 255 255 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 255 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 52 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Data saving The contents of the RTTY memory/received signal can be saved into the USB-Memory. q During RTTY decode screen indication, push
[<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the RTTY decode sec-
ond menu. w Push [SAVE] (F-4) to select decode file save screen. e Change the following conditions if desired. File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition. Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the file name, if necessary. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] or [Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^
_
( ) { } _
@ can be selected. Push [] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push
[] (F-2) to move the cursor right, [DEL] (F-3) delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to insert a space. The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom. 123 Symbol ABC F-1 F-2 DEL F-3 SPACE F-4 F-1
<MENU1> /
DIR/FILE F-4
/
SAVE EDIT EXIT/SET Main dial Decode file save screen file name edit c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name. File format z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to enter save option screen. x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
mat from Text to HTML. Text is the default setting. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default setting. c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indication. Saving location z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen. x Select the desired directory or folder in the USB-Memory. Push [ ] (F-4) to select the upper directory. Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select folder in the same directory. Push and hold [ ] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a folder in the directory. Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder. Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete the folder. Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak-
ing a new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner as the File name above.) c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file name. F-4 DEF F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial SAVE/OPT MAKE REN DEL F-2 F-3 F-4 F-1 F-5 DIR/FILE SAVE/OPT Save option screen r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5). After saving is completed, returns to RTTY decode sec-
ond menu automatically.
For your convenience!
Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for PC data storage. When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] connector on the front panel, the le name can also be edited from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is required. 53
PSK operation A high-quality DSP-based PSK encoder/decoder is built-in to the IC-7600. When connecting a PC key-
board (p. ??), PSK operation can be performed with-
out PSK software installed on your PC. If desired, you can also use your PSK software; con-
sult the manual that comes with the software. q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK. After PSK mode is selected, push and hold
[RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes. PSK or PSK-R appears. e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode screen. The IC-7600 has a built-in PSK decoder. r Tune to the desired signal with the main dial. The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator narrow, as show in the example below. The radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator may be displayed sporadically. When a PSK signal is received, the water-fall display is activated. The water-fall display shows the signals within the pass-
band. Received PSK signals appear as vertical lines. t Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit. y Type from the connected keyboard to enter the
[TX] indicator lights red. message that you want to transmit. The typewritten contents are indicated in the TX buffer screen and transmitted immediately. The text color will be changed when transmitted. Press one of [F1][F8] to transmit the TX memory con-
tents. u Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive.
For your convenience The transmission contents can be typed before being transmitted. q Perform the steps q to r above. w Type from the connected keyboard to enter the message that you want to transmit. The message is shown in the TX buffer screen. e Press [F12] of the connected keyboard to transmit the message. The color of displayed text, in the TX buffer screen, will be changed when transmitted. To cancel the transmission, press [F12] twice. r Press [F12] of the keyboard to return to receive. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
[TX]
[RX]
DECODE indicator indicator F-3 Band keys
[AF]
RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET Main dial Appears TX buffer screen FFT scope RX contents screen Water-fall Vector tuning indicator 1500 1195 1805 Vector tuning indicator indication example Tuned QPSK signal Tuned BPSK signal BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 54 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D About BPSK and QPSK modes BPSK and QPSK modes are available for PSK. BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying) mode is the most commonly used mode. QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) mode has error correction capability to provide better decoding than BPSK mode in marginal condition. However, more accurate tuning is required with QPSK mode, due to the tight phase margin of QPSK. q During PSK mode selection, push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the PSK decode screen. w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select PSK decode sec-
ond menu. e Push [B/QPSK] (F-2) to toggle between BPSK and QPSK mode alternately. F-1 F-2 F-3
<MENU1>
B/QPSK DECODE PSK decode screen BPSK mode PSK decode screen QPSK mode 55 D Functions for the PSK decoder indication q Push a band key to select the desired band. w Push [RTTY/PSK] to select PSK. After PSK mode is selected, push and hold [RTTY/
PSK] for 1 sec. to toggle between PSK and PSK-R modes. PSK or PSK-R appears. e Push [DECODE] (F-3) to display the decode screen. When tuned into a PSK signal, decoded characters are displayed in the RX contents screen. r Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) to freeze the current screen. Push [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) again to release the function. t Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the PSK decode appears while the function is in use. screen size from normal and wide. S/RF meter type during wide screen indication can be selected in display set mode. (pgs. ??, ??) y Push and hold [HOLD/CLR] (F-2) for 1 sec. to clear the displayed characters. indicator disappears at the same time when the hold function is in use. u Push [AFC/NET] (F-3) to turn the AFC function appears. ON. If a PSK signal is received within the AFC tuning range, the decoder automatically tunes into the signal and the offset frequency is displayed. The AFC tuning range is set to 15 Hz as the default. Optional 8 Hz setting is available in PSK decode set mode. (p. ??) NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal properly when a weak PSK signal is received. i Push [AFC/NET] (F-3) again to turn the NET func-
tion ON. o Push and hold [AFC/NET] (F-3) for 1 sec. to add appears additionally. the offset frequency to the displayed frequency.
!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to close the PSK decode screen. D Setting the decoder threshold level Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level if some char-
acters are displayed when no signal is received. q Call up the PSK decode screen as described above. w Push [ADJ] (F-4) to select the threshold level set-
ting condition. e Rotate the main dial to adjust the PSK decoder threshold level. Push and hold [DEF] (F-5) for 1 sec. to select the default setting. r Push [ADJ] (F-4) to exit from the threshold level setting condition. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 DECODE AFC/NET
/
F-3 WIDE F-6 Band keys F-2 RTTY/PSK EXIT/SET HOLD/CLR AFC/NET indications AFC and NET Offset frequency indicators 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 56 DECODE
/
F-3 TX MEM 14/58 F-6 F-1 PT1 F-4 PT4 or F-1 PT5 F-4 PT8 DECODE
/
F-3 TX MEM PT1..PT8 F-6 F-5 EDIT /
AUTO TX EXIT/SET 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D PSK memory transmission Pre-set characters can be sent using the PSK mem-
ory. Contents of the memory are set using the edit menu. q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select PSK decode screen. w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select PSK memory screen. e Push [14/58] (F-6) to select memory bank then push one of the function keys ([PT1] (F1) to
[PT4] (F-4) or [PT5] (F-1) to [PT8] (F-4)). When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory contents will be transmitted immediately. When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents will be transmitted immediately when function key is pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the connected keyboard is pressed, depending on auto transmission/
reception setting (see below). The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on setting. D Automatic transmission/reception setting q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select PSK decode screen. w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select PSK memory screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select PSK mem-
ory edit screen. PSK memory contents of Channel 1 (PT1) is selected. e Push [PT1..PT8] (F-6) several times to select the desired PSK memory. r Push [AUTO TX] (F-5) several times to select the AUTO TX desired condition, as follows. AUTO TX/RX : Automatically transmits the selected memory and returns to receive after the transmission.
: Automatically transmits the selected memory. To return to receive, press [F12] on the key-
board.
: Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory. Automatically returns to receive after the transmission. AUTO RX No indication : Press [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the selected memory and press [F12] again to return to receive. t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to exit from PSK mem-
ory edit condition. NOTE: The transceiver always functions in the AUTO TX/RX setting when no keyboard is con-
nected. 57 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 DECODE
/
F-3 TX MEM PT1..PT8 F-6 F-5 EDIT EXIT/SET 123 abc Symbol ABC F-1 F-2 F-3 DEL F-4 SPACE Main dial PSK memory edit screen D Editing PSK memory The contents of the PSK memories can be set using the memory edit menu. The memory can store and re-transmit 8 PSK message for often-used PSK infor-
mation. Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters per memory channel. Programming contents q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select PSK decode screen. w Push [TX MEM] (F-3) to select PSK memory screen, then push [EDIT] (F-5) to select PSK mem-
ory edit screen. PSK memory contents of the Channel 1 (PT1) is selected. e Push [PT1..PT8] (F-6) several times to select the desired PSK memory channel to be edited. r Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or
[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character, or push the keypad for number input.
[abc] (MF6) appears when [ABC] (MF6) is pushed when ABC character group is selected. and [Symbol]
(MF7) appears when [123] (MF7) is pushed when 123 character group is selected. Selectable characters (using the main dial);
Key selection Characters A to Z (capital letters) a to z (small letters) 0 to 9 (numbers)
! # $ % & ? " ` ^ +
/ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } _ _
@
( is for the memory con-
tents setting only.) t Push [] (F-1) or [] (F-2) to move the cursor Pre-programmed contents backwards or forwards, respectively. Pushing [DEL] (F-3) deletes a character and [SPACE]
(F-4) inserts a space. y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-
acters. u Push [EXIT/SET] to set the contents and exit PSK memory edit screen.
For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the PSK memory con-
tents can also be edited from the keyboard. CH PT1 PT2 PT3 PT4 PT5 PT6 PT7 PT8 Contents DE Icom Icom K DE Icom Icom Icom K QSL UR 599 599 BK QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599 BK 73 GL SK CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom K My transceiver is IC7600 & Antenna is a 3 element triband yagi. My PSK equipment is internal modulator &
demodulator of the IC7600. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 58 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D PSK decode set mode This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-
tion, time stamp setting, etc. Setting contents q During PSK mode operation, push [DECODE] (F-3) to select PSK decode screen. w Push [<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the second PSK decode menu, then push [SET] (F-5) to select PSK decode set mode. Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen size from nor-
mal and wide. e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set item. r Set the desired condition using the main dial. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default condition or value. Push [ ] (F-3) to select the set contents for some items. t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode. F-1 F-2 F-3 DEF F-4 SET WIDE F-6 F-5 F-1 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial
<MENU1>
DECODE PSK FFT Scope Averaging Select the FFT scope waveform averaging function from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF) OFF Recommendation!
If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, using the default or smaller averaging setting is recom-
mended. PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color Set the color for the FFT scope waveform. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. PSK AFC Range Select the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) function operating range from 15 Hz (default) and 8 Hz. 51 255 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 153 15Hz NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal properly when a weak PSK signal is received. PSK Time Stamp Turn the time stamp (date, transmission or reception time) display ON and OFF. ON ON OFF
: Displays the time stamp.
: No time stamp display. PSK Time Stamp (Time) Selects the clock display for time stamp usage. NOTE: The time wont be displayed when OFF is selected in PSK Time Stamp as above. Local Local : Selects the time that set in Time (Now). UTC* : Selects the time that set in CLOCK2.
* The name of choice may differ according to CLOCK2 Name setting (p. ??). UTC is the default name of CLOCK2. 59 PSK Time Stamp (Frequency) Selects the operating frequency display for time stamp usage. NOTE: The frequency wont be displayed when OFF is selected in PSK Time Stamp as below left. PSK Font Color (Receive) Set the text color for received characters. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. PSK Font Color (Transmit) Set the text color for transmitted characters. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. PSK Font Color (Time Stamp) Set the text color for time stamp indication. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. PSK Font Color (TX Buffer) Set the text color in the TX buffer screen. The color is set in RGB format. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 OFF ON OFF
: Displays the operating frequency.
: No operating frequency display. 128 128 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 255 255 106 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 106 0 189 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 155 255 255 Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255. 255 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 60 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Data saving The contents of the PSK memory/received signal can be saved into the USB-Memory. q During PSK decode screen indication, push
[<MENU1>] (F-1) to select the PSK decode sec-
ond menu. w Push [SAVE] (F-4) to select decode file save screen. e Change the following conditions if desired. File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition. Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the file name, if necessary. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] or [Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^
( ) { } _ ~ @ can be selected. Push [] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push
[] (F-2) to move the cursor right, [DEL] (F-3) delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to insert a space. The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom. 123 Symbol ABC F-1 F-2 DEL F-3 SPACE F-4 F-1
<MENU1> /
DIR/FILE F-4
/
SAVE EDIT EXIT/SET Main dial Decode file save screen file name edit c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name. File format z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to enter save option screen. x Rotate the main dial to select the saving for-
mat from Text to HTML. Text is the default setting. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default setting. c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indication. Saving location z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen. x Select the desired directory or folder in the USB-Memory. Push [ ] (F-4) to select the upper directory. Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select folder in the same directory. Push and hold [ ] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a folder in the directory. Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder. Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete the folder. Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to mak-
ing a new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner as the File name above.) c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file name. F-4 DEF F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial SAVE/OPT MAKE REN DEL F-2 F-3 F-4 F-1 F-5 DIR/FILE SAVE/OPT Save option screen r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5). After saving is completed, returns to PSK decode sec-
ond menu automatically.
For your convenience!
Two data formats, Text and HTML, are available for PC data storage. When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] connector on the front panel, the le name can also be edited from the keyboard. In this case, a USB hub is required. 61
Repeater operation A repeater retransmits a received signal on a differ-
ent frequency. When using a repeater, the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive frequency by an offset frequency. A repeater can be accessed using split frequency operation with the transmit frequency shifted to the repeater's receive frequency. For accessing a repeater which requires an access tone, set the tone frequency in tone frequency set mode as described below. q Set the offset frequencies (HF, 50 MHz) and turn ON the quick split function in Others set mode in advance. (pgs. ??, ??) w Push [VFO/MEMO] to select VFO mode. e Push the desired band key. r Push [AM/FM] several times to select FM mode. t Set the receive frequency (repeater output fre-
quency). y Push and hold [SPLIT] for 1 sec. to start repeater operation. Repeater tone is turned ON automatically.
[SPLIT] indicator lights and appears on the LCD. Shifted transmit frequency and TX appear in the sub band. The transmit frequency can be monitored while push-
ing [XFC]. u Push and hold [PTT] to transmit; release [PTT] to receive. i To return to simplex, push [SPLIT] momentarily. D Repeater access tone frequency setting Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be accessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on your normal signal and must be set in advance. The transceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz. q During FM mode operation, push and hold [TONE]
(MF7) for 1 sec. to enter tone frequency set mode. w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select REPEATER TONE item. e Rotate the main dial to select the desired repeater tone frequency. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default setting. r Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indication. Available tone frequencies 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 85.4 088.5 091.5 094.8 097.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5
(unit: Hz) 254.1 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
[SPLIT]
indicator SPLIT Band keys AM/FM XFC Main dial VFO/MEMO Appears TONE F-1 F-2 F-4 DEF EXIT/SET Main dial Tone frequency set mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 62 TONE XFC EXIT/SET Main dial F-1 F-2 F-4 DEF Appears Tone frequency set mode 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Tone squelch operation The tone squelch opens only when receiving a sig-
nal containing a matching subaudible tone. You can silently wait for calls from group members using the same tone. q Set the desired frequency band and select FM mode. w Push [TONE] (MF7) to turn the tone squelch func-
tion ON. e Push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to enter appears tone frequency set mode. r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select T-SQL TONE item. t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone squelch frequency. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default setting. y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indica-
tion. u When the received signal includes a matching tone, squelch opens and the signal can be heard. When the received signals tone does not match, tone squelch does not open. However, the S-indicator shows signal strength. To open the squelch manually, push [XFC]. i Operate the transceiver in the normal way. o To cancel the tone squelch, push [TONE] (MF7) to clear TSQL. Available tone frequencies 67.0 69.3 71.9 74.4 77.0 79.7 82.5 085.4 088.5 091.5 094.8 097.4 100.0 103.5 107.2 110.9 114.8 118.8 123.0 127.3 131.8 136.5 141.3 146.2 151.4 156.7 159.8 162.2 165.5 167.9 171.3 173.8 177.3 179.9 183.5 186.2 189.9 192.8 196.6 199.5 203.5 206.5
(unit: Hz) 254.1 210.7 218.1 225.7 229.1 233.6 241.8 250.3 63 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 Band keys SSB AM/FM Main dial Appears
Data mode (AFSK) operation When operating AMTOR or PACKET with your TNC and/or PC software, consult the manual that comes with the TNC and/or the software. q Connect a PC and TNC to the transceiver. (p. ??) w Push a band key to select the desired band. e Push [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select the desired oper-
ating mode. r Push and hold [SSB] or [AM/FM] that is pushed in step e for 1 sec. to turn data mode ON. One of -D1, -D2 or -D3 is additionally appears. During data mode selection, push and hold [SSB] or
[AM/FM] for 1 sec. to select data mode 1 (D1), 2 (D2) and 3 (D3) in sequence. t Rotate the main dial to tune to the desired signal and decode it correctly. Also use the tuning indicator of the TNC or software. During SSB data mode, the 14 tuning function can be used for critical tuning. y Operate the PC (software) or TNC to transmit. When operating in SSB data mode, adjust the TNC output level so that the ALC meter reading doesnt go outside the ALC zone. NOTE: When data mode 1 (D1) is selected, the audio input from the [ACC1] (pin 4) is used for transmission instead of [MIC]s. (Modulation input connector can be changed in ACC set mode (pgs.
??, ??) The fixed condition is used for SSB data transmis-
sion as follows:
: OFF
[COMP]
: MID Tx bandwidth
: 0 Tx Tone (Bass) Tx Tone (Trebles) : 0
For your information Carrier frequency is displayed when SSB data mode is selected. See the diagram at right for the tone-pair example. Tone-pair example 2325 Hz 200 Hz 2125 Hz Carrier frequency
(displayed frequency) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 64 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Spectrum scope screen This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to dis-
play the frequency and relative signal strength of received signals on the strengths of signals. The IC-
7600 has two modes for the spectrum display one is center mode, and the other is fixed mode. In addition, the IC-7600 has a mini scope screen to save screen space. D Center mode Displays signals around the set frequency within the selected span. The set frequency is always displayed at the center of the screen. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [SCOPE] (F-1) to select the scope screen. e Push [CENT/FIX] (F-5) to select the center mode. is displayed when center mode is selected. r Push [SPAN] (F-1) several times to select the scope span. 2.5, 5.0, 10, 25, 50, 100 and 250 kHz are available. Push and hold [SPAN] (F-1) for 1 sec. to return to 2.5 kHz span. Sweep speed is selectable for each span indepen-
dently in scope set mode. (pgs. ??, ??) t Push [ATT] (F-2) several times to activate an attenuator or turn the attenuator OFF. 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available. Push and hold [ATT] (F-2) for 1 sec. to turn OFF the attenuator. y Push [MARKER] (F-3) to turn the marker for trans-
displays the marker at the transmit frequency. displays the marker at the sub readout frequency. mit frequency ON or OFF.
<< or >> appears when the marker is out of range. The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal while transmitting. This can be deactivated in scope set mode. (p. ??) The spectrum scope shows the peak level hold func-
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the current spectrum in a different color until the receive frequency changes. This can be deactivated and the waveform color can be set in scope set mode. (p. ??) u Push [HOLD] (F-4) to freeze the current spectrum display. The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set appears while the function is in use. mode. (p. ??) i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen. NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost signal may also appear. Push [ATT] (F-2) several times to activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case. Spurious signals may be displayed. They are gen-
erated in the internal scope circuit and do not indi-
cate a transceiver malfunction. 65 HOLD F-4 CENT/FIX F-5 F-1
/
SCOPE SPAN F-2 ATT F-3 EXIT/SET MARKER Scope spurious signal example Spurious signals may be received on the spectrum scope screen regardless of the transceivers state
(TX or RX). They are generated in the scope circuit. This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction. Scope spurious example RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 D Fixed mode Displays signals within the specified frequency range. Conditions on the selected frequency band can be observed at a glance when using this mode. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. HOLD F-4 CENT/FIX F-5 w Push [SCOPE] (F-1) to select the scope screen. e Push [CENT/FIX] (F-5) to select the fixed mode. r Push [ATT] (F-2) several times to activate an is displayed when fixed mode is selected. attenuator or turn the attenuator OFF. 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available. Push and hold [ATT] (F-2) for 1 sec. to turn OFF the attenuator. t Push [MARKER] (F-3) several times to select the marker for transmit frequency or turn the marker OFF. displays the marker at the transmit frequency. displays the marker at the sub readout frequency. displays the marker at the main readout fre-
quency. (always displayed)
<< or >> appears when the marker is out of range. The spectrum scope shows the transmit signal while transmitting. This can be deactivated in scope set mode. (p. ??) The spectrum scope shows the peak level hold func-
tion. Peak levels are displayed in the background of the current spectrum in a different color until the receive frequency changes. This can be deactivated and the waveform color can be set in scope set mode. (p. ??) y Push [HOLD] (F-4) to freeze the current spectrum waveform. The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set appears while the function is in use. mode. u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen. NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost signal may appear. Push [ATT] (F-2) several times to activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case. The scope bandwidth can be specified for each fre-
quency band independently in scope set mode.
(pgs. ?? to ??) F-1
/
SCOPE SPAN F-2 ATT F-3 EXIT/SET MARKER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 66 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Mini scope screen indication The mini scope screen can be displayed with another screen display, such as set mode menu, decode screen, memory list screen, etc. simultaneously. q Set the scope mode (center or fixed), marker, attenuator, span, etc. in advance. (pgs. ??, ??) w Push and hold [MAIN/SUB M.SCOPE] for 1 sec. to select the mini scope indication. The S/RF meter type during mini scope indication can be selected in display set mode (Meter Type (Wide Screen) item). (p. ??) D Scope set mode This set mode is used to set the waveform color, sweeping speed, scope range for fixed mode, etc. q During spectrum scope display ON, push
[SET] (F-6) to select scope set mode screen. Push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle the screen size between normal and wide. w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired set item. e Set the desired condition using the main dial. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default condition or value. Push [ ] (F-3) to select the set contents for some items. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode. 67 MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE M.SCOPE SET F-6 F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 DEF EXIT/SET
[DIAL]
RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 D Scope set mode (continued) Scope during Tx (CENTER Type) Turn display of the transmit signal ON and OFF. ON NOTE: Transmit signal display is available for the center mode only. Max Hold Turn the peak level hold function ON and OFF. ON CENTER Type Display Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope indication (center mode only). Filter Center Filter Center : Shows the selected filters center frequency at the center. Waveform Color (Current) Set the waveform color for the currently received signals. Carrier Point Center
: Shows the selected operating mode carrier point frequency at the center. Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.)
: In addition to the carrier point center setting above, the actual frequency is displayed for the bottom of the scope. 217 241 247 The color is set in RGB format. Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range. The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. Waveform Color (Max Hold) 58 110 147 Set the waveform color for the received signals max-
imum level. The color is set in RGB format. Push [ ] (F-3) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range. The set color is indicated in the box beside the Sweep Speed Select the sweep speed for the 2.5 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 2.5k) Select the sweep speed for the 5 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST. 5k)
(
RGB scale. MID NOTE: Signals may be displayed incorrectly with FAST setting. MID NOTE: Signals may be displayed incorrectly with FAST setting. Select the sweep speed for the 10 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 10k) FAST 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 68 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Scope set mode (continued) Select the sweep speed for the 25 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 25k) Select the sweep speed for the 50 kHz span selec-
tion from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 50k) Select the sweep speed for the 100 kHz span selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 100k) Select the sweep speed for the 250 kHz span selection from SLOW, MID and FAST.
( 250k) Fixed Edges Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode for bands below 1.6 MHz.
( 0.03 1.60) FAST FAST FAST FAST 0.750 1.250 MHz Set the frequencies within 0.030 to 1.600 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 1.6 to 2 MHz band is selected.
( 1.60 2.00) 1.800 2.000 MHz Set the frequencies within 1.600 to 2.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 2 to 6 MHz band is selected.
( 2.00 6.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 6 to 8 MHz band is selected.
( 6.00 8.00) 3.500 4.000 MHz Set the frequencies within 2.000 to 6.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 7.000 7.300 MHz Set the frequencies within 6.000 to 8.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 69 D Scope set mode (continued) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 8 to 11 MHz band is selected.
( 8.00 11.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 11 to 15 MHz band is selected.
(11.00 15.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 15 to 20 MHz band is selected.
(15.00 20.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 20 to 22 MHz band is selected.
(20.00 22.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 22 to 26 MHz band is selected.
(22.00 26.00) RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 10.100 10.150 MHz Set the frequencies within 8.000 to 11.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 14.000 14.350 MHz Set the frequencies within 11.000 to 15.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 18.068 18.168 MHz Set the frequencies within 15.000 to 20.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 21.000 21.450 MHz Set the frequencies within 20.000 to 22.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 24.890 24.990 MHz Set the frequencies within 22.000 to 26.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 70 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Scope set mode (continued) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 26 to 30 MHz band is selected.
(26.00 30.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 30 to 45 MHz band is selected.
(30.00 45.00) Set the scope edge frequencies for fixed mode scope when the 45 to 60 MHz band is selected.
(45.00 60.00) 28.000 28.500 MHz Set the frequencies within 26.000 to 30.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 30.000 30.500 MHz Set the frequencies within 30.000 to 45.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 50.000 50.500 MHz Set the frequencies within 45.000 to 60.000 MHz range in 1 kHz steps. As edge frequencies are set, the other edge fre-
quency will be automatically set for a display band width of 5 kHz to a maximum of 500 kHz. 71 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
Preamplier The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Set this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving weak signals.
Push [P.AMP] (MF3) several times to set the pre-
amp OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
Push and hold [P.AMP] (MF3) for 1 sec. to turn the preamp function OFF. For all HF bands High-gain preamp for 24 MHz band and above
About the P.AMP2 The P.AMP 2 is a high gain receive amplifier. When the P.AMP 2 is used in the presence of strong elec-
tromagnetic fields, distortion sometimes results. In such cases, use the transceiver with the P.AMP 1 or P.AMP OFF setting. The P.AMP 2 is most effective when:
Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are weak. Receive sensitivity is insufficient when using low-
gain antennas, or while using a narrow band antenna (such as small loop, a Beverage antenna or a short Yagi antenna).
Attenuator The attenuator prevents a desired signal from distor-
tion when very strong signals are near the desired frequency or when very strong electromagnetic fields, such as from broadcast stations near your location.
Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to set the attenua-
tor 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB or attenuator OFF.
Push and hold [ATT] (MF4) for 1 sec. to turn the attenuator function OFF. 6 dB attenuation 12 dB attenuation 18 dB attenuation P.AMP ATT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 72 RIT CLEAR
[RIT/TX]
RIT shifting frequency XFC 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
RIT function The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function com-
pensates for off-frequency operation of the received station. The function shifts the receive frequency up to 9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps without moving the trans-
mit frequency. q Push [RIT] to turn the RIT function ON and OFF. and the shifting frequency appear when the function is ON. w Rotate the [RIT/TX] control. Push and hold [CLEAR] for 1 sec. to reset the RIT fre-
quency. Push [CLEAR] momentarily to reset the RIT frequency when the quick RIT/TX clear function is ON. (p. ??) Push and hold [RIT] for 1 sec. to add the shift fre-
quency to the operating frequency. D RIT monitor function When the RIT function is ON, pushing and holding
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency directly (RIT is temporarily cancelled).
For your convenience Calculate function The shift frequency of the RIT function can be added/
subtracted to the displayed frequency.
While displaying the RIT shift frequency, push and hold [RIT] for 1 sec. 73 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
AGC function The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to produce a constant audio output level even when the received signal strength varies greatly. The transceiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics
(time constant: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM mode. The FM mode AGC time constant is fixed as FAST (0.1 sec.) and AGC time constant cannot be changed. D Selecting the preset value q Select any non-FM mode. w Push [AGC] (MF5) several times to select AGC fast, AGC medium (MID) or AGC slow.
[AGC]
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value q Select any non-FM mode. w Push and hold [AGC] (MF5) for 1 sec. to enter AGC set mode. e Push [AGC] (MF5) several times to select FAST time constant. r Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for AGC FAST. AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. t Push [AGC] (MF5) to select medium time con-
stant. y Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for AGC MID. AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. u Push [AGC] (MF5) to select slow time constant. i Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
stant for AGC SLOW. AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode) or turned OFF. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. o Select another non-FM mode. Repeat steps e to i if desired.
!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the AGC set mode screen. EXIT/SET
[DIAL]
F-4 DEF Selectable AGC time constant
(unit: sec.) Mode SSB CW Default 0.3 (FAST) 2.0 (MID) 6.0 (SLOW) 0.1 (FAST) 0.5 (MID) 1.2 (SLOW) 0.1 (FAST) 0.5 (MID) 1.2 (SLOW) 3.0 (FAST) 5.0 (MID) 7.0 (SLOW) FM 0.1 (FAST) AM RTTY PSK Selectable AGC time constant 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0 Fixed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 74 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Twin PBT operation
<MODE> SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AM PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting the IF frequency slightly outside of the IF filter passband to reject interference. The IC-7600 uses DSP for the PBT function. Moving both [TWIN-PBT] controls to the same position shifts the IF both above and below the received frequency.
The LCD shows the passband width and shift fre-
quency graphically. The indicator on the [PBT-CLR] switch lights when PBT is in use.
Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter the filter set screen. Current passband width and shift fre-
quency is displayed in the filter set screen.
To set the [TWIN-PBT] controls to the center posi-
tions, push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. The variable range depends on the passband width and mode. The edge of the variable range is half of the passband width, and PBT is adjustable in 25
(SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes) or 100 Hz (AM mode) steps. The [TWIN-PBT] controls should normally be set to the center positions (PBT setting is cleared) when there is no interference. When PBT is used, the audio tone may be changed. Not available for FM mode. While rotating the [TWIN-PBT] controls, noise may occur. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction. PBT-CLR
[TWIN-PBT]
FILTER Shows filter width, shifting value and condition Filter set screen PBT operation example Both controls at center position Cutting the lower passband edge Cutting both lower and higher passband edges PBT1 PBT2 PBT1 PBT2 PBT1 PBT2 Passband Passband IF center frequency Interference Desired signal Interference Desired signal Interference 75
IF lter selection The transceiver has 3 passband width IF filters for each mode. For SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width can be set within 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 41 passband widths are available. For RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within 50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 32 passband widths are available. For AM mode, the passband width can be set within 200 Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 pass-
band widths are available. For FM mode, the passband width is fixed and 3 passband widths are available. The filter selection is automatically memorized in each mode. The PBT shift frequencies are automatically mem-
orized in each filter. D IF lter selection q Select the desired mode. w Push [FILTER] several times to select the IF filter 1, 2 or 3. The selected passband width and filter number is dis-
played in the LCD. D Filter passband width setting (except FM mode) q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen. w Select any mode except FM. Passband widths for FM modes are fixed and cannot be set. e Push [FILTER] several times to select the desired IF filter. r Rotate the main dial after pushing [BW] (F-1) to set the desired passband width. Then push [BW] (F-1). In SSB, CW and PSK modes, the passband width can be set within the following range. 50 to 500 Hz 600 to 3600 Hz In RTTY mode, the passband width can be set within 50 Hz steps 100 Hz steps the following range. 50 to 500 Hz 600 to 2700 Hz In AM mode, the passband width can be set within the 50 Hz steps 100 Hz steps following range. 200 Hz to 10 kHz 200 Hz steps Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. t Repeat steps w to r if desired for other modes. y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 DEF F-4 FILTER EXIT/SET Main dial F-1 BW Selected IF filter Passband width The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the passband width is changed. This filter set screen graphically displays the PBT shift frequencies and CW pitch operations. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 76 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT D Roong lter selection The IC-7600 has 3, 6 and 15 kHz roofing filters at the 1st IF frequency. The roofing filter provides interfer-
ence reduction from nearby strong signals. q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen. w Select any mode except FM. e Push [ROOFING] (F-5] to select the desired filter width from 15 kHz, 6 kHz and 3 kHz. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen. Filter set screen DEF F-4 ROOFING F-5 FILTER EXIT/SET Default roofing filter
(unit: kHz) Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3 Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3 SSB SSB-D 6 6 6 RTTY PSK AM 15 6 15 15 6 6 15 6 6 6 6 15 6 6 15 CW DEF F-4 SHAPE F-6 F-1 F-2 FILTER EXIT/SET Main dial Filter shape set mode D DSP lter shape The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data and CW can be selected independently from soft and sharp. q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen. w Select SSB, SSB data or CW mode. e Push [SHAPE] (F-6) to select the desired filter shape from soft and sharp. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen. The filter shape can be set for each band (HF and 50 MHz bands), mode, as well as the passband width setting (CW only) independently from your default setting in filter shape set mode. D Filter shape set mode The type of DSP filter shape for SSB, SSB data and CW can be selected independently from soft and sharp. q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set screen. w Push and hold [SHAPE] (F-6) for 1 sec. to enter fil-
ter shape set mode. w Select the desired item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2). e Rotate the main dial to select the filter shape from soft and sharp. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter shape set mode. 77 D Filter shape set mode (continued) SSB HF Select the filter shape for SSB mode in HF bands.
(600Hz ) SSB-D
(600Hz ) Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in HF bands. CW Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands.
( 500Hz) CW Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands.
(600Hz ) RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. 50M SSB Select the filter shape for SSB mode in 50 MHz band.
(600Hz ) SOFT The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. SSB-D
(600Hz ) Select the filter shape for SSB data mode in 50 MHz band. CW
( 500Hz) Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band. CW
(600Hz ) Select the filter shape for CW mode in 50 MHz band. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower. SHARP The set filter shape is automatically used only when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 78 DUAL WATCH SPLIT
[BAL] control CHANGE MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE M.SCOPE Appears 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Dualwatch operation Dualwatch monitors 2 frequencies simultaneously. During dualwatch, both frequencies should be on the same band, because the bandpass filter in the RF cir-
cuit is selected for the main readout frequency. q Set a desired frequency into the main band. w Push and hold [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec. Equalized receive frequency appears on the sub band frequency readout. This quick dualwatch function can be turned OFF in set mode. (p. ??) appears. Pushing [DUALWATCH] momentarily activates the dualwatch with the previously operated frequency. e Rotate the main dial to set another desired fre-
quency. r Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCODE] to enables the sub band access when changing the frequency band, operating mode, etc. in sub band. Push [MAIN/SUB M.SCODE] again for the main band access. t Adjust the [BAL] control to set a suitable signal strength balance between the main and sub read-
out frequencies. S-meter shows the combined signal strength. y To transmit on the sub readout frequency, push
[CHANGE] or [SPLIT]. NOTE:
A beat note may be heard depending on the fre-
quency combination. The RIT function can be used for the main read-
out only. The TX function can be used for the transmit readout (main readout when the split function OFF; sub readout when the split function ON). 79 Scanning during dualwatch Scanning operates only for the main readout. To operate the scan during dualwatch, scan on the main readout and use the sub readout for your QSO using both dualwatch and split frequency operation. q Program the desired programmed scan edges in the same amateur band. See p. ?? for program-
ming. If you plan to operate a F scan, programming the scan edges may not be necessary. w Push [SPLIT] to turn the split frequency function ON. appears. e Select VFO mode for the main readout. r Set the desired operating frequency for the main readout. t Push and hold [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec. The main and sub readout frequencies are equalized appears. and the dualwatch function is turned ON. y Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. u Push [PROG] (F-1) or [F] (F-2) to start the pro-
grammed scan or F scan, respectively. Scan activates on the main readout between the pro-
grammed scan edges or within the F span. Transmitting on the sub readout stops the scan. i To cancel the scan, push [EXIT/SET]. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4 DUAL WATCH SPLIT F-1 PROG F-2 F F-5 EXIT/SET SCAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 80 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Noise blanker
<MODE> SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AM The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as the noise from car ignitions. The noise blanker is not available for FM mode.
Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker function ON and OFF. The indicator on this switch lights green when when the NB F-1 F-2 F-4 DEF EXIT/SET Main dial NB set mode 50%
8 50 noise blanker is ON. When using the noise blanker, received signals may be distorted if they are excessively strong or for other types of noise than impulse. Turn the noise blanker OFF, or set the noise blanker thresh-
old level (see below) to a shallow position in this case. D NB set mode To deal with various type of noise, attenuation level and noise blanking duration can be set in NB set mode. q Push and hold [NB] for 1 sec. to enter NB set mode. w Select the desired item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2). e Rotate the main dial to the desired set value or condition. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit NB set mode. NB Level Set the noise blanker threshold level from 0% to 100%. NB Depth Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10. NB Width Set the blanking duration from 1 to 100. 81 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
Noise reduction The noise reduction function reduces random noise components and enhances desired signals which are buried in noise. The DSP performs the random noise reduction function. q Push [NR] to turn the noise reduction ON. w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduc-
The indicator on this switch lights green. tion level. e Push [NR] to turn the noise reduction OFF. The indicator goes off.
[NR]
control NR Noise reduction OFF Noise reduction activated Large rotations of the [NR] control results in audio signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control for maximum readability. Noise components Desired signal (CW)
Dial lock function The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock function electronically locks the dial.
Push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to tog-
gle the dial lock function ON and OFF. The [LOCK] indicator lights when the dial lock function is in use. NOTE: When LOCK/SPEECH is selected in
[[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch] item in others set mode, pushing [SPEECH/LOCK] activates the dial lock function. (p. ??)
[LOCK] indicator SPEECH LOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 82 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Notch function This transceiver has auto and manual notch func-
tions. The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically attenuate up to 3 beat tones, tuning signals, etc., even if they are moving. The manual notch can be set to attenuate a frequency via the [NOTCH] control. The auto notch can be used in SSB, AM and FM mode. The manual notch can be used in SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK and AM modes.
Push [NOTCH] to toggle the notch function between auto, manual and OFF in SSB and AM modes.
Push [NOTCH] to turn the manual notch function ON and OFF in CW, RTTY, PSK modes.
Push [NOTCH] to turn the auto notch function ON and OFF in FM mode. The indicator on this switch lights green. When the manual notch function is ON, push and hold
[NOTCH] for 1 sec. to select the notch filter width for manual notch from wide, middle and narrow. Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch via the
[NOTCH] control. appears when auto notch is in use. appears when manual notch is in use. While tuning the manual notch, noise may be heard. This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an equipment malfunction.
Autotune function
<MODE> CW/AM The Automatic tuning function tunes the displayed fre-
quency (max. CW: 500 Hz, AM: 5 kHz) automatically when an off-frequency signal is received. This func-
tion is active while in CW or AM mode is selected.
Push [AUTOTUNE] to toggle the autotune function ON or OFF. blinks when autotune function is acti-
vated. After 30 sec. has passed, the autotune function stops tuning automatically even its still off-frequency. 83 Auto notch indication NOTCH
[NOTCH]
control Appears Manual notch indication Appears Auto notch OFF Auto notch ON Desired signal (AF) Desired signal (AF) Unwanted tone frequency Particular frequency is attenuated AUTO TUNE Appears
1 2 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.83 MiB | September 02 2009 |
VOX function
<MODE> SSB/AM/FM The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function switches between transmit and receive with your voice. This function provides hands-free operation. D Using the VOX function q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM). w Push [VOX] (MF6) to turn the VOX function ON or OFF. VOX appears while the VOX is in use. D Adjusting the VOX function q Select a phone mode (SSB, AM, FM). w Push and hold [VOX] (MF6) for 1 sec. to enter VOX set mode. e Select the desired item using [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2). r Rotate the main dial to the desired set value or condition. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit VOX set mode. VOX Gain This item adjusts the VOX gain for the VOX func-
tion. Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive to your voice. While speaking into the microphone with your nor-
mal voice level, rotate the main dial to the point where the transceiver is continuously transmitting. AntiVOX This item adjusts the ANTI-VOX gain for the VOX function. Higher values make the VOX function less sensitive to receiver output audio from a speaker or headphones. During receive, rotate the main dial to the point where the transceiver does not switch to transmit due to received audio from the speaker. VOX Delay Set the VOX delay for a convenient interval before returning to receive within 0.0 to 2.0 sec. range. VOX Voice Delay Set the VOX voice delay to prevent clipping of the first few syllables of a transmission when switching to transmit. OFF, Short, Mid and Long settings are available. RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
[VOX]
F-1 F-2 DEF F-4 SSB AM/FM EXIT/SET Main dial VOX set mode screen 50%
This setting can be adjusted from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps. 50%
This setting can be adjusted from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps. 0.2s OFF When using the VOX voice delay, turn the TX monitor function OFF to prevent transmitted audio from be echoed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 84 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Break-in function
<MODE> CW The break-in function is used in CW mode to auto-
matically toggle the transceiver between transmit and receive when keying. The IC-7600 is capable of full break-in or semi break-in. D Semi break-in operation During semi break-in operation, the transceiver imme-
diately transmits when keying, then returns to receive after a pre-set delay time has passed from when you stop keying. q Push [CW] to select CW or CW-R mode. w Push [BK-IN] (MF6) once or twice to turn the semi break-in function ON. BKIN appears. e Rotate [BK-IN DELAY] to set the break-in delay time (the delay from transmit to receive). When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust the keying speed. D Full break-in operation During full break-in operation, the transceiver imme-
diately transmits when keying, then returns to receive after you stop keying. q Push [CW] to select CW or CW-R mode. w Push [BK-IN] (MF6) once or twice to turn the full break-in function ON. F-BKIN appears. When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to adjust the keying speed.
[BK-IN]
CW
[BK-IN DELAY]
[KEY SPEED]
[BK-IN]
CW
[KEY SPEED]
Appears Appears 85 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
[COMP]
[MIC GAIN]
SSB EXIT/SET Main dial COMP/TBW set screen Speech compressor is OFF Speech compressor is ON
[COMP]
SSB F-3 EXIT/SET TBW WIDE setting
Speech compressor
<MODE> SSB The speech compressor increases average RF output power, improving signal strength and readability. q Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB mode. w Push and hold [COMP] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select COMP TBW set screen. e Adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so that the ALC meter reads within the ALC zone, whether or not you speak softly or loudly. t Push [COMP] to turn the speech compressor ON. r While speaking into the microphone, rotate the main dial , so that the COMP meter reads within the COMP zone (10 to 20 dB range) for your nor-
mal voice level. When the COMP meter peaks exceed 20 dB, your transmitted voice may be distorted. t Push [COMP] (MF7) or [EXIT/SET] to exit COMP TBW set mode. y Adjust the ALC meter reading within the 30 to 50%
range of the ALC scale. (p. ??)
Transmit lter width setting
<MODE> SSB The transmit filter width for SSB mode can be selected from wide, middle and narrow. q Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB mode. w Push and hold [COMP] (MF7) for 1 sec. to select COMP TBW set screen. t Push [COMP] to turn the speech compressor ON or OFF. t Push [TBW] (F-3) several times to select the desired transmit filter width from wide, middle and narrow. The filter can be independently set on the speech com-
pressor function is ON and OFF. The following filters are specified as the default. Each of the filter width can be re-set in level set mode.
(p. ??) WIDE : 100 Hz to 2.9 kHz MID
: 300 Hz to 2.7 kHz NAR : 500 Hz to 2.5 kHz t Push [COMP] (MF7) or [EXIT/SET] to exit COMP TBW set mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 86 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
TX function The TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to 9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when cancel-
ling the 1 Hz step readout) without moving the receive frequency. q Push [TX] to turn TX function ON. and the shifting frequency appear when the function is ON. w Rotate the [RIT/TX] control. e To reset the TX frequency, push and hold
[CLEAR] for 1 sec. Push [CLEAR] momentarily to reset the TX fre-
quency when the quick RIT/TX clear function is ON.
(p. ??) r To cancel the TX function, push [TX] again. and the shifting frequency disappears. When RIT and TX are ON at the same time, the
[RIT/TX] control shifts both the transmit and receive frequencies from the displayed frequency at the same time. D TX monitor function When the TX function is ON, pushing and holding
[XFC] allows you to monitor the operating frequency directly (TX is temporarily cancelled).
For your convenience Calculate function The shift frequency of the TX function can be added/
subtracted to the displayed frequency.
While displaying the TX shift frequency, push and hold [TX] for 1 sec.
Monitor function The monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-
mit IF signals in any mode. Use this to check voice characteristics while adjusting SSB transmit parame-
ter (p. ??). The CW side tone functions regardless of the
[MONITOR] switch setting. q Push [MONITOR] to switch the monitor function ON and OFF. The indicator on this switch lights green when the mon-
itor function is ON. w Push and hold [MONITOR] to monitor set mode. e Rotate the main dial to adjust the monitor level. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a default value. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit monitor set mode. NOTE: When using the VOX voice delay, turn the monitor function OFF; or transmitted audio will be echoed. 87 TX CLEAR
[RIT/TX]
Appears XFC MONITOR F-4 DEF EXIT/SET Main dial Monitor set mode
Split frequency operation Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and receive in the same mode on two different frequen-
cies. Split frequency operation is performed using 2 frequencies on the main and sub readouts. The following is an example of setting 21.290 MHz for receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting. q Set 21.290 MHz (USB) in VFO mode. w Push [SPLIT] momentarily, then push and hold
[CHANGE] for 1 sec. The quick split function is much more convenient for selecting the transmit frequency. See the next section for details. The equalized transmit frequency and appear on the LCD.
[SPLIT] indicator lights. appears to show the transmit frequency read-
out. e Rotate the main dial while pushing [XFC] to set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz. The transmit frequency can be monitored while push-
ing [XFC]. r Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit on 21.310 MHz. To change the transmit and receive frequencies, push
[CHANGE] to exchange the main and sub readouts.
CONVENIENT Direct shift frequency input The shift frequency can be entered directly. q Push [F-INP ENT]. w Enter the desired shift frequency with the digit keys. 1 kHz to 1 MHz can be set. When you require a negative shift direction, push in advance. e Push [SPLIT] to input the shift frequency in the sub readout and the split function is turned ON. Dualwatch function The dualwatch function is convenient for tuning the transmit frequency while monitoring both frequencies used for transmitting and receiving. Split lock function (p. ??) Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating the main dial changes the receive frequency. To prevent this, use both the split lock and dial lock functions to change the transmit frequency only. The split lock function cancels the dial lock function while pushing
[XFC] during split frequency operation. The dial locks effect during split frequency operation can be selected in the set mode for both receive and transmit frequencies; or only the receive frequency.
(p. ??) RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT 4
[SPLIT] indicator SPLIT MAIN
/SUB M.SCOPE M.SCOPE CHANGE XFC Main dial When the split function ON When [XFC] is pushed The split frequency operation is ready 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 88 4 RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
Quick split function When you find a DX station, an important consider-
ation is how to set the split frequency. When you push and hold the [SPLIT] switch for 1 sec., the split frequency operation is turned ON, and the sub readout frequency is equalized to the main readout frequency, then enters standby for transmit frequency input. This shortens the time needed to begin split fre-
quency operation. The quick split function is ON by default. For your convenience, it can be turned OFF in others set mode. (p. ??) In this case, the [SPLIT] switch does not equalize the main and sub readout frequencies. q Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB) in VFO mode. w Push and hold [SPLIT] for 1 sec. Split frequency operation is turned ON. The sub readout is equalized to the main readout fre-
quency. The sub readout enters standby for transmit frequency input and appears. During FM mode operation, the sub readout frequency shifts from the main readout frequency according to the others set mode setting. e Rotate the main dial to set the transmit frequency;
or, input the transmit frequency using the keypad and [F-INP ENT]; or, input a shift frequency using the keypad and [SPLIT]. disappears when [F-INP ENT] is pushed. Offset frequency setting with the keypad and [SPLIT].
[Example]
To transmit on 1 kHz higher frequency:
- Push [1.8 1] then [SPLIT]. To transmit on 3 kHz lower frequency:
- Push [GENE ], [7 3] then [SPLIT]. D Split lock function The split lock function is convenient for changing only the transmit frequency. When the split lock function is not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotat-
ing the main dial, changes the receive frequency. The split lock function is ON by default, but can be turned OFF in set mode. (p. ??) q While split frequency operation is ON, push and hold [SPEECH/LOCK] for 1 sec. to activate the split lock function.
[LOCK] indicator lights. w While pushing and holding [XFC], rotate the main dial to change the transmit frequency. If you accidentally release [XFC] while rotating the main dial, the receive frequency does NOT change. 89
[SPLIT] indicator SPLIT Keypad XFC Main dial
[LOCK] indicator Main dial XFC SPEECH LOCK VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 5
About digital voice recorder The IC-7600 has digital voice memories, up to 4 messages for transmit, and up to 20 messages for receive. A maximum message length of 30 sec. can be recorded into receive memory (total message length for all channels of up to 209 sec.) and a total mes-
sage length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded in trans-
mit memory. The transmit memory is very convenient for repeated CQ and exchange transmissions in contests, as well as when making repeated calls to DXpeditions. q Select any mode. w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to display voice recorder screen. e Push [EXIT/SET] to display voice recorder menu. r Push [PLAY] (F-1) or [MIC REC] (F-2) to select the desired memory channel screen, then record audio or playback the contents as described below. t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit voice recorder screen. Example When [REC] is pushed and held for 1sec. F-1 F-2 EXIT/SET REC PLAY Push and hold REC for 1 sec. Push REC momentarily Push and hold REC for 1 sec. Push REC momentarily
(starts recording)
(stops recording)
(starts recording)
(stops recording) 20 sec. Push REC momentarily within 30 sec. after pushing and holding REC for 1 sec., records the all contents. Example When [REC] is pushed momentarily These contents wont be recorded. 30 sec. Push REC momentarily after passing 30 sec. from pushing and holding REC for 1 sec., records the 30 sec. before canceling the record. Push REC momentarily Push REC momentarily
(starts recording)
(starts recording) NOTE: The contents will be recorded into an independent memory channels automatically. 15 sec.
(default) 3 sec. Push REC momentarily records the contents of the previous 15 sec.*
When REC is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.*
from the last REC operation, all the contents between REC operations will be recorded.
*The recording time period can be changed with Normal Rec Time in voice set mode (p. ??). Playing back the all contents in a channel Playing back the end of 5 sec.* in a channel Push PLAY (F-3) momentarily. Or, push and hold PLAY for 1 sec. Push PLAY momentarily. 30 sec. (max.) Not playing back Play back (5 sec.; default)
*The playing back time period can be changed with Short Play Time in voice set mode (p. ??). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 90 5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Recording a received audio Up to 20 receive voice memories are available in the IC-7600. A total of 209 sec. of audio can be recorded in receive messages. However, the maximum record-
able length into a single message is 30 sec. This voice recorder records not only the received audio, but also the information such as set operat-
ing frequency, mode, and the recording time for your future reference. D Basic recording q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Select the desired mode. e Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder screen. Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX memory channel (T1T4) appears, push [T/R] (F-6) to select RX memory channel. r Push and hold [REC] for 1 sec. to start recording. The operating frequency, mode and current time are programmed as the memory names automatically. t Push [REC] momentarily to stop recording. IMPORTANT!
Push [REC] to stop recording before, or when 30 sec. has elapsed from the start of recording. The voice recorder memory records 30 sec. (max.) of audio before [REC] is pushed. For example, when recording 40 sec. of audio, the first 10 sec. audio will be over-written with the last 10 sec., so that the total of audio recorded is only 30 sec. When you record the 21st audio message, or when the total audio length exceeds 209 sec., the oldest recorded audio is automatically erased to make room for the new audio. y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder screen. NOTE: When transmit (or [PTT] is pushed) while recording, no audio will be recorded. D One-touch recording To record the received signal immediately, one-touch voice recording is available. F-2 F-6 EXIT/SET REC VOICE T/R The remaining time for recording is indicated.
Push [REC] momentarily to store the previous 15 sec. audio. The recordable time period can be set in voice set mode. (p. ??) REC 91
Playing the recorded audio D Basic playing q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder screen. Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX memory message (T1T4) appears, push [T/R] (F-6) to select RX memory message. e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired voice memory to playback. r Push [PLAY] (F-3) to start playback. indicators appear and the timer counts down. t Push [PLAY] (F-3) again to stop playback if desired. Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played, or after 30 sec. y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder screen. D One-touch playing The previously recorded audio in message 1 can be played back without selecting voice recorder screen.
Push [PLAY] momentarily to playback the last indicator appears. 5 sec. of the previously recorded audio. Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played, or after 5 sec. The playback time period can be set in voice set mode.
(p. ??) VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 5 F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET PLAY Appears Appears Counts down PLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 92 5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Protect the recorded contents The protect function is available to protect the recorded contents from accidental erasure, such as over-writing, etc. q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory. w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired voice message. e Push [PROTECT] (F-4) to turn the protect function ON and OFF. indicator appears when the contents is protected. r Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder screen. F-1 F-2 F-4 PROTECT
Erasing the recorded contents The recorded contents can be erased independently by message. q Call up the voice recorder screen, RX memory. w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired voice message to be erased. e Push [PLAY] (F-3) to start playback. indicators appear and the timer counts down. r Push and hold [CLR] (F-6) for 1 sec. to erase the contents. Push [PROTECT] (F-4) to release the protection in advance if necessary. t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder screen. F-1 F-2 F-3 PLAY F-6 CLR 93
Recording a message for transmit To transmit a message using the voice recorder, record the desired message in advance as described below. The IC-7600 has digital voice memories for transmis-
sion, up to 4 messages and a total message length of up to 99 sec. can be recorded. D Recording q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder screen. e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voice recorder menu. r Push [MIC REC] (F-2) to select the voice mic. record screen. t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired message. y Push and hold [REC] (F-4) for 1 sec. to start indicator appears. recording. Speak into the microphone without pushing [PTT]. Previously recorded contents are cleared. Audio output from the internal speaker is automatically muted. u While speaking into the microphone with your nor-
mal voice level, adjust the [MIC GAIN] control so that the [MIC-REC LEVEL] indicator reads within 100%. i Push [REC] (F-4) momentarily to stop recording. The recording is terminated automatically when the remaining time becomes 0 sec. o Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder screen. D Confirming a message for transmit q Perform the steps q to r as D Recording above. w Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired message. e Push [PLAY] (F-3) to playback the recorded con-
tents. indicator appears. r Push [PLAY] (F-3) again to stop playback. Playback is terminated automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are played. t Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder screen. VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 5 F-1 F-2 F-4 REC Appears Adjust [MIC GAIN] control so that this indicator reads within 100%. F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET PLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 94 123 abc Symbol ABC DEL F-3 T1..T4 F-6 Keypad F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial SPACE Voice memory name editing example 5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Programming a memory name Memory messages can be tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 30 characters each. Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ? " ` ^ + / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~
@) and spaces can be used. (See the table below.) q Record a message as described in page ??. w During the VOICE MIC-RECORD screen indica-
tion, push [NAME] (F-5) to enter memory name edit condition. A cursor appears and blinks. e Push [T1..T4] (F-6) several times to select the desired voice message. r Input the desired character by rotating the main dial or by pushing the band key for number input. Push [ABC] (MF6) or [abc] (MF6) to toggle capital and small letters. Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals and symbols. Push [] (F-1) or [] (F-2) for cursor movement. Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. Push [SPACE] (F-4) to input a space. Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also enter numerals. t Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name. y Repeat steps e to t to program another voice The cursor disappears. messages name, if desired. u Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice recorder screen. Usable characters Key selection Editable characters A to Z (capital letters) a to z (small letters) 0 to 9 (numbers)
! # $ % & ? ` ^ +
/ . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~
@
For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] (A) con-
nector on the front panel, the memory name can also be edited from the keyboard. 95 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 5 T3 F-3 T/R F-6 F-1 T1 F-2 T2 F-4 T4 EXIT/SET Appears Counts down DEF F-6 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial TX LEV.
Sending a recorded message q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Select a phone mode by pushing [SSB] or [AM/FM]. e Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder screen. If the receive voice message appears, push [T/R] (F-6) to select TX message (T1T4). r Push the desired message switch, [T1] (F-1) to [T4]
(F-4), momentarily to transmit the contents. The transceiver transmits automatically. indicator appears and the memory timer counts down. You hear the transmitted message from the speaker as the default. This can be turned OFF in voice set mode.
(p. ??) t Push the selected message switch, [T1] (F-1) to
[T4] (F-4), again to stop, if desired. The transceiver returns to receive automatically when all of the recorded contents in the message are trans-
mitted. y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the voice memory screen.
For your information When an external keypad is connected to [KEY]
or one of [F-1][F-4] key of the keyboard that is connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the front panel is pushed, the recorded message, T1T4, can be transmitted without opening the voice recorder screen. See pages ??, ?? for details. D Transmit level setting q Call up the voice recorder screen as described as above. w Push [TX LEV.] (F-5) to select the voice memory transmit level set condition. e Push the desired message switch, [T1] (F-1) to [T4]
(F-4), momentarily to transmit the contents. The transceiver transmits automatically. indicator appears and the memory timer counts down. r Rotate the main dial to adjust the transmit voice level. Push and hold [DEF] (F-6) for 1 sec. to select the default condition. t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the voice recorder screen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 96 5 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS
Voice set mode Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and normal recording times for voice recorder. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [VOICE] (F-2) to call up the voice recorder screen. e Push [EXIT/SET] to select voice recorder menu. r Push [SET] (F-6) to select voice set mode screen. t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired item. y Rotate the main dial to set the desired condition or value. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default condition or value. u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice set mode screen. F-1 F-2 F-4 DEF EXIT/SET Main dial Auto Monitor Turn on the automatic monitor function for recorded audio contents transmission. ON ON
: Monitors transmit audio automatically when sending a recorded audio. OFF : Monitors transmit audio only when the mon-
itor function is in use. Short Play Time Set the desired time period for one-touch playback
(when [PLAY] is pushed momentarily). 5s 3 to 10 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(default: 5 sec.) Normal Rec Time Set the desired time period for one-touch recording
(when [REC] is pushed momentarily). 15s 5 to 15 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(default: 15 sec.) 97 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 5
Saving a voice message into the USB-Memory D Saving the received audio memory The recorded RX memory contents can be saved into the USB-Memory. The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom. q During voice recorder RX memory screen display, push [SAVE] (F-5) to select voice file save screen. Previously selected screen, TX or RX memory, is dis-
played. If the TX message (T1T4) appears, push [T/
R] (F-6) to select RX message. w Change the following conditions if desired. File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition. Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the file name, if necessary. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6) : A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^ (
) { } _ ~ @ can be selected. Push [] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push []
(F-2) to move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3) to delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to insert a space. F-1 F-4 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial DIR/FILE EDIT SAVE Voice recorder RX memory screen Voice file save screen file name edit c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name. Saving location z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view While saving screen. x Select the desired directory or folder in the USB-Memory. Push [ ] (F-4) to select the upper directory. Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select folder in the same directory. Push and hold [ ] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a folder in the directory. Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder. Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete the folder. Push and hold [MAKE] (F-6) for 1 sec. to making a new folder. (Edit the name with the same man-
ner as the File name above.) c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file name. When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the le name can also be edited from the keyboard. In this case, an USB hub is required. e Push [SAVE] (F-6). After the saving is completed, return to voice recorder RX memory screen automatically. D Saving the TX memory The TX memory contents can also be saved into the USB-Memory. However, the contents are saved with the message list, set mode conditions, etc. at the same time. See page ?? for details. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 98 6 MEMORY OPERATION
Memory channels The transceiver has 101 memory channels. Memory mode is very useful for quick change to often-used frequencies. All 101 memory channels are tuneable which means the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily with the main dial, etc. in memory mode. MEMORY CHANNEL Regular memory channels Scan edge memory channels MEMORY CHANNEL NUMBER 199 P1, P2 CAPABILITY TRANSFER TO VFO OVER-
WRITING CLEAR One frequency and one mode in each memory channel. One frequency and one mode in each memory channel as scan edges for programmed scan. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Memory channel selection D Using the []/[] keys q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select memory mode. w Push []/[] several times to select the desired memory channel. Push and hold []/[] for continuous selection.
[UP] and [DN] on the microphone can also be used. e To return to VFO mode, push [VFO/MEMO] again. D Using the keypad q Push [VFO/MEMO] to select memory mode. w Push [F-INP ENT]. e Push the desired memory channel number using the keypad. Enter 100 or 101 to select scan edge channel P1 or P2, respectively. r Push [] or [] to set the memory channel.
[EXAMPLE]
To select the memory channel 3;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [7 3], then push [] or []. To select the memory channel 12;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [3.5 2], then push [] or
[]. To select the scan edge channel P1;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [50 0], [50 0], then push
[] or []. To select the scan edge channel P2;
- Push [F-INP ENT], [1.8 1], [50 0], [1.8 1], then push
[] or []. 99 VFO/MEMO Keypad F-INP ENT VFO/MEMO MEMORY OPERATION 6 WIDE F-6
Memory list screen The memory list screen simultaneously shows 7 memory channels and their programmed contents. 13 memory channels can be displayed in the wide mem-
ory list screen. You can select a desired memory channel from the memory list screen. D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list screen. Pushing [WIDE] (F-6) switches the standard and wide screens. e While pushing and holding [SET] (F-2), rotate the main dial to select the desired memory channel.
[] and [] can also be used. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen. F-2 SET F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial MEMORY Memory list screen D Conrming programmed memory channels q Select memory list screen as described above. w While pushing [ROLL] (F-1), rotate the main dial to scroll the screen. e Push [SET] (F-2) to select the highlighted memory channel, if desired. appears beside the selected memory channel num-
ber in the memory list screen and the selected memory channel contents are displayed below the frequency readout. r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen. F-1 ROLL F-2 SET EXIT/SET Main dial 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 100 6 MEMORY OPERATION
Memory channel programming Memory channel programming can be preformed ei-
ther in VFO mode or in memory mode. D Programming in VFO mode q Set the desired frequency, operating mode and fil-
ter width in VFO mode. w Push []/[] several times to select the desired memory channel. Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-
sired channel. Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
--.---.-- appears if the selected memory channel is a blank channel (and does not have contents). e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the dis-
played frequency, operating mode, etc., into the memory channel.
[EXAMPLE]:
Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into memory channel 12. MW 7 3 SSB or MW Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. D Programming in memory mode q Select the desired memory channel with []/[] in memory mode. Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout instead of the frequency readout. No indication appears if the selected memory channel is a blank channel (and does not have contents). w Set the desired frequency and operating mode in memory mode. To program a blank channel, use direct frequency entry with the keypad or memo pads, etc. (p. ??) e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the dis-
played frequency and operating mode into the memory channel.
[EXAMPLE]:
Programming 21.280 MHz/USB into memory channel 19. or then 21 7 SSB MW Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. 101
Frequency transfers The frequency and operating mode in a memory channel can be transferred to the VFO. Frequency transfers can be performed in either VFO mode or memory mode. D Transferring in VFO mode This is useful for transferring programmed contents to a VFO. q Select VFO mode with [VFO/MEMO]. w Select the memory channel to be transferred with
[]/[]. Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-
MEMORY OPERATION 6 TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO) Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW sired channel. Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
--.---.-- appears if the selected memory channel is a blank channel. In this case transferring is not possible. or e Push and hold [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. to transfer the frequency and operating mode. Transferred frequency and operating mode appear on the frequency readout. MW Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. D Transferring in memory mode This is useful for transferring frequency and operating mode while operating in memory mode. When you have changed the frequency or operat-
ing mode in the selected memory channel:
Displayed frequency, mode and filter setting are transferred. Programmed frequency, mode and filter in the memory channel are not transferred, and they re-
main in the memory channel. q Select the memory channel to be transferred with
[]/[] in memory mode. Then, set the frequency or operating mode if required. w Push and hold [VFO/MEMO] for 1 sec. to transfer the frequency, mode and filter. Displayed frequency, mode and filter are transferred to the VFO. e To return to VFO mode, push [VFO/MEMO] mo-
mentarily. TRANSFER EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (M-ch 16) Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW MW Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. Programmed contents appear. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 102 6 MEMORY OPERATION
Memory names All memory channels (including scan edges) can be tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 10 charac-
ters each. Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ? " ` ^ + / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~
@) and space can be used. D Editing (programming) memory names q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list screen. e Select the desired memory channel. r Push [NAME] (F-4) to edit memory channel name. A cursor appears and blinks. Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be edited. t Input the desired character by rotating the main dial or by pushing the keypad for number input. Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters. Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols. Push [] (F-1) or [] (F-2) for cursor movement. Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. Push [SPACE] (F-4) to input a space. Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also en-
ter numerals. y Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name. u Repeat steps e to y to program another memory The cursor disappears. channels name, if desired. i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.
For your convenience When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] (A) con-
nector on the front panel, the memory name can also be edited from the keyboard.
Memory clearing Any unused memory channels can be cleared. The cleared memory channels become blank chan-
nels. q Select memory mode with [VFO/MEMO]. w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list screen. e Select the desired memory channel with []/[]. r Push and hold [CLR] (F-5) for 1 sec. to clear the contents. The programmed frequency, operating mode and filter disappear. t To clear other memory channels, repeat steps e and r. 103 123 abc Symbol ABC DEL F-3 Keypad F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial SPACE F-5 CLR F-5
(CLR) Beep Beep Beep Push for 1 sec. MEMORY OPERATION 6 MP-W MP-R MP-W Newest
Memo pads The transceiver has a memo pad function to store fre-
quency and operating mode for easy writing and re-
calling. The memo pads are separate from memory channels. The default number of memo pads is 5, however, this can be increased to 10 in set mode if desired. (p. ??) Memo pads are convenient when you want to mem-
orize a frequency and operating mode temporarily, such as when you find a DX station in a pile-up, or when a desired station is busy for a long time and you want to temporarily search for other stations. Use the transceivers memo pads instead of relying on hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced. D Writing frequencies and operating modes into memo pads You can store the readout frequency and operating mode by pushing [MP-W]. When you store the 6th frequency and operating mode, the oldest stored frequency and operating mode are automatically erased to make room for the new settings. Each memo pad must have its own unique combi-
nation of frequency and operating mode; memo pads having identical settings cannot be written. Oldest Erased In this example, 21.276 MHz (USB) will be erased when 7.067 MHz (LSB) is written. MP-R Newest MP-R MEMO PADS Oldest D Calling up a frequency from a memo pad You can call up the desired frequency and operat-
ing mode of a memo pad by pushing [MP-R] several times. Both VFO and memory modes can be used. The frequency and operating mode are called up, starting from the most recently written. When you call up a frequency and an operating mode from memo pads with [MP-R], the previously dis-
played frequency and operating mode are automat-
ically stored in a temporary pad. The frequency and operating mode in the temporary pad can be recalled by pushing [MP-R] several times. You may think there are 6 memo pads because 6 different frequencies (5 are in memo pads and 1 is in the tempo-
rary pad) are called up by [MP-R]. If you change the frequency or operating mode called up from a memo pad with the main dial, etc., the frequency and operating mode in the tempo-
rary pad are erased. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 104 7 SCANS
Scan types The scan function can be used on the main read-
out only. You can perform a scan while operating on a fre-
quency using the dualwatch or split functions. PROGRAMMED SCAN Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies
(scan edge memory channels P1 and P2). F SCAN Repeatedly scans within F span area. Scan edge P1 or P2 Scan edge P2 or P1 F frequency
+F frequency Start frequency Scan Jump Scan Scan Jump This scan operates in VFO mode. This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes. MEMORY SCAN Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels. SELECT MEMORY SCAN Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels. Blank channel Blank channel Mch 2
2 Mch 3
1 Mch 4 Mch 2
2 Mch 3
1 Mch 4 Mch 1
1
*1, 2 and 3 show that the channel is specified as the select memory. Mch 5
1 Mch 1
1
*1, 2 and 3 show that the channel is specified as the select memory. Mch 5
1 Mch 99
1 Mch 7
1 Mch 6
3 Mch 99
1 Mch 7
1 Mch 6
3 This scan operates in memory mode. This scan operates in memory mode.
Preparation Channels For programmed scan:
Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem-
ory channels P1 and P2. (p. ??) For F scan:
Set the F span (F scan range) in the scan screen. For memory scan:
Program 2 or more memory channels except scan edge memory channels. For select memory scan:
Designate 2 or more memory channels as select memory channels. To designate the channel as a se-
lect memory channel, choose a memory channel, then push [SELECT] (F-3) in the scan screen (mem-
ory mode) or in the memory list screen. Scan resume ON/OFF You can select the scan to resume or cancel when de-
tecting a signal in scan set mode. Scan resume ON/
OFF must be set before performing a scan. See p. ??
for ON/OFF setting and scan resume condition details. Scan speed Scan speed can be selected from 2 levels, high or low, in scan set mode. See p. ?? for details. 105 Squelch condition
Scan starts with squelch open For programmed scan:
When tuning step is 1 kHz or less:
The scan continues until it is stopped manually it does not pause* even if signals are detected.
* The scan is paused when the squelch is closed and then opened (scan resumes after 10 sec. has passed when the scan resume is ON; scan is cancelled when the scan resume is OFF). When tuning step is more than 5 kHz:
The scan pauses on each step when the scan re-
sume is ON; not applicable when the scan resume is OFF. For memory scan:
Scan pauses on each channel when the scan resume is ON; not applicable when the scan resume is OFF.
Scan starts with squelch closed Scan stops when a signal is detected. If the scan resume is set to ON in scan set mode, the scan pauses for 10 sec. when detecting a signal, then resumes. When a signal disappears while scan is paused, scan re-
sumes 2 sec. later.
Scan set mode Scan speed and the scan resume condition can be set using the scan set mode. q Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select scan screen. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select scan set mode. e Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired item. r Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the de-
fault setting. t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to scan menu. SCANS 7 SCAN SET F-5 F-6 F-1 F-2 F-4 DEF EXIT/SET Main dial Scan Speed Select the desired scan speed from high and low. HIGH HIGH : scan is faster. LOW : scan is slower. Scan Resume Set the scan resume function ON and OFF. ON ON
: When detecting a signal, scan pauses for 10 sec., then resumes. When a signal dis-
appears, scan resumes 2 sec. later. OFF : When detecting a signal, cancels scanning. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 106 7 SCANS
Programmed scan operation q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Select VFO mode. e Select the desired operating mode. The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning. r Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. t Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. See p. ?? for squelch condition. If the [RF/SQL] control function is set as AUTO, the squelch is always open in SSB, CW and RTTY modes.
(pgs. ??, ??, ??)
[RF/SQL]
F-1 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial PROG SCAN RECALL y Push [PROG] (F-1) to start the programmed scan. and decimal points blink while scanning. u When the scan detects a signal, scan stops, pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch status. Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan. i To cancel the scan, push [PROG] (F-1). o Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if desired. If the same frequencies are programmed into the scan edge memory channel P1 and P2, pro-
grammed scan will not start.
F scan operation q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Select VFO mode or a memory channel. e Select the desired operating mode. The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning. r Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. t Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. See p. ?? for squelch condition. If the [RF/SQL] control function is set as AUTO, the squelch is always open in SSB, CW and RTTY modes.
(pgs. ??, ??, ??) y Set the F span by pushing [F SPAN] (F-4). 5 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 50 kHz, 100 kHz, 500 kHz and 1000 kHz are selectable. F-2 F F-4 F SPAN u Rotate the main dial to set a center frequency of the F span. i Push [F] (F-2) to start the F scan. and decimal points blink while scanning. o When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch status. Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan.
!0 To cancel the scan, push [F] (F-2).
!1 Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall the frequency that was set before starting the scan. 107 SCANS 7
Fine programmed scan/Fine F scan In fine scan (programmed or F), the scan speed de-
creases when the squelch opens, but the transceiver keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step shifts from 50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. e Set for programmed scan or F scan as described F F-2 FINE F-3 on previous page. r Push [PROG] (F-1) or [F] (F-2) to start a scan. and decimal or points blink while scanning. t Push [FINE] (F-3) to start a fine scan. or blinks instead of respectively. or
, y When the scan detects a signal, the scan speed decreases but scan does not stop. u Push [PROG] (F-1) or [F] (F-2) to stop the scan;
push [FINE] (F-3) to cancel the fine scan. Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan. i Push and hold [RECALL] (F-5) for 1 sec. to recall the frequency that is set before starting the scan, if desired.
[RF/SQL]
F-1 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial PROG SCAN RECALL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 108 7 SCANS
Memory scan operation q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Select memory mode. e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. See p. ?? for squelch condition. If the [RF/SQL] control function is set as AUTO, the squelch is always open in SSB, CW and RTTY modes.
(pgs. ??, ??, ??)
[RF/SQL]
F-1 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial MEMO SCAN t Push [MEMO] (F-1) to start the memory scan. and decimal points blink while scanning. y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition. u To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] (F-1) . Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan. 2 or more memory channels must be programmed for memory scan to start.
Select memory scan operation q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Select memory mode. e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. r Set [RF/SQL] open or closed. See p. ?? for squelch condition. If the [RF/SQL] control function is set as AUTO, the squelch is always open in SSB, CW and RTTY modes.
(pgs. ??, ??, ??) t Push [MEMO] (F-1) to start the memory scan. and decimal points blink while scanning. y Push [SEL No.] (F-4) several times to select the F-3 SELECT select scan number from 1, 2, 3 and 1,2,3. u Push [SELECT] (F-3) to start select memory scan;
push [SELECT] (F-3) again to return to memory scan, if desired. during select memory scan. blinks instead of i When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops, pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition. o To cancel the scan, push [MEMO] (F-1). Rotating the main dial also cancels the scan. 2 or more memory channels must be designated as select memory channels, as well as the same select scan channel number, for select memory scan to start. 109
Setting select memory channels D Setting in scan screen q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Select memory mode. e Push [SCAN] (F-5) to select the scan screen. r Select the desired memory channel to set as a se-
lect memory channel.
[]/[] keys and direct keypad selections can be used.
(p. ??) t Push [SELECT] (F-3) several times to set the memory channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not. (p. ??)
1, 2 or 3 appears on the LCD to show that the channel is specified as the select memory. y Repeat steps r to t to program another memory channel as a select memory channel. u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scan screen. D Setting in memory list screen q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list screen. e Rotate the main dial while pushing [ROLL] (F-1) or
[SET] (F-2) to select the desired memory channel.
[]/[] keys and direct keypad selections can be used.
(p. ??) r Push [SELECT] (F-3) several times to set the memory channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not.
1, 2 or 3 appears on the LCD to show that the channel is specified as the select memory. t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory channel as a select memory channel. y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen. D Erasing the select scan setting q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [MEMORY] (F-4) to select memory list screen, or push [SCAN] (F-5) to select scan screen. e Push and hold [SELECT] (F-3) for 1 sec. to display memory select all clear window. r Push one of the following keys to clear all select scan setting.
[1] (F-1)
[2] (F-2)
[3] (F-3)
[1,2,3] (F-4) : Clears all select setting. t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.
: Clears all 1 setting.
: Clears all 2 setting.
: Clears all 3 setting. SCANS 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 110 7 SCANS
Tone scan The transceiver can detect subaudible tones in a re-
ceived signal. By monitoring a signal that is being transmitted on a repeater input frequency, you can determine the tone frequency required to access the repeater. q Set the desired frequency or memory channel to be checked for a tone frequency. w Push [AM/FM] several times to select FM mode. e Push and hold [TONE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to enter tone frequency screen. r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to check the repeater tone frequency or tone squelch frequency, respec-
tively. t Push [T-SCAN] (F-6) to start the tone scan. y When a matching tone frequency is detected, the SCAN blinks while scanning. tone scan pauses. The tone frequency is set temporarily on a memory channel. Program the memory channel to store the tone frequency permanently. The decoded tone frequency is used for the repeater tone frequency or tone squelch frequency. u To stop the scan, push [T-SCAN] (F-6). Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the de-
fault frequency. i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit tone frequency screen. TONE DEF F-4 T-SCAN F-6 F-1 F-2 AM/FM EXIT/SET 111 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 8
Automatic antenna selection The transceiver covers 0.0360 MHz over 10 bands. Each band key has a band memory which can mem-
orize a selected antenna (ANT1, ANT2, ANT1/RX an-
tenna and ANT2/RX antenna). When you change the operating frequency beyond a band, the previously used antenna is automatically selected. This function is convenient when you use 2 or 3 antennas. To use the band memory, enter set mode and con-
firm that Auto is selected as the [ANT] switch item.
(p. ??) Antenna selection mode: Auto (default) The antenna tuner ON/OFF condition is also memo-
rized in the band memory.
[Example]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to
[ANT1], a 21/28/50 MHz antenna is connected to
[ANT2]. When the antenna selector function is set to Auto, an antenna is automatically selected when the transceiver changes bands. Antenna selection mode: Manual
[ANT] (MF1) functions, however, band memory does not function. In this case, you must select an antenna manually. Under the following conditions, Manual should be selected as the [ANT] switch set mode item.
- When using 1 antenna.
- When using an external antenna selector for more than 3 antennas (except for receive antenna).
- When using an external antenna tuner. NOTE: When Auto or Manual is selected, the antenna tuner ON/OFF condition is consistent with
[ANT] (MF1). Antenna selection mode: OFF
[ANT] (MF1) does not function and [ANT1] is always selected. RX only 3.5/7 MHz bands 21/28/50 MHz bands ANT1 ANT2 RX ANT IN ANT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 112 8 ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION
Antenna tuner operation The internal automatic antenna tuner matches the transceiver to the connected antenna automatically. After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable capac-
itor settings are memorized as a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore, when you change the frequency range, the variable capacitors are automatically preset to the memorized setting. CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON when no antenna is connected. This will damage the transceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection.
For your convenience When you purchase a brand-new antenna, or you want to change the antenna settings, you can erase the all of the internal antenna tuner preset points with Tuner Preset Memory Clear in others set mode.
(p. ??) D Tuner operation
Push [TUNER] to turn the internal antenna tuner ON. The antenna is tuned automatically when the antenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1. When the tuner is ON, the indicator on the switch lights green While tuning, the indicator on the switch blinks. NOTES:
NEVER transmit without an antenna properly con-
nected to antenna port in use. When 2 antennas are connected, select the an-
tenna to be used with [ANT] (MF1). If the SWR is higher than about 1.5:1 when tun-
ing farther than 100 kHz from an antennas pro-
grammed preset point, push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to start manual tuning. The internal tuner may not be able to tune in AM mode. In such cases, push and hold [TUNER]
for 1 sec. to manually tune. When you purchase a brand-new antenna, or you want to change the antenna settings, you can erase the all of the internal antenna tuner preset points with Tuner Preset Memory Clear in others set mode.
(p. ??) TUNER D Manual tuning During SSB operation at low voice levels, the internal tuner may not automatically tune correctly. In such cases, manual tuning is helpful.
Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec., to start man-
ual tuning. A side tone is emitted and the indicator on the switch blinks red while tuning. If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1 after 20 sec. of tuning, the indicator on the switch goes out. Automatic tumer start (HF bands only) If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions of VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start func-
tion and turn the tuner OFF. This function activates the tuner automatically when the SWR exceeds 1.5:1. This function is controlled in set mode. (p. ??). PTT tuner start The tuner is always tuned when the PTT is pushed after the frequency is changed (more than 1% from last-tuned frequency). This function removes the push and hold [TUNER] operation and activates for the first transmission on a new frequency. This function is turned ON in set mode. (p. ??). Antenna tuner of the IC-PW1/EURO When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC-PW1/EUROs tuner, tune with the external an-
tenna tuner, while the internal tuner is turned OFF. After tuning is completed, turn the internal tuner ON. Otherwise, both tuners tune simultaneously and cor-
rect tuning may not be obtained. 113 See the instruction manual included with each an-
tenna tuner for their respective operations. ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION 8 Optional external tuner operation AH-4 HF AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER The AH-4 matches the IC-7600 to a long wire an-
tenna more than 7 m/23 ft long (3.5 MHz and above). See p. ?? for the transceiver and AH-4 connection. See the AH-4 instruction manual for AH-4 installa-
tion and antenna connection details. When connecting the AH-4, the antenna connec-
tor assignments are [ANT2] for the internal tuner and [ANT1] for the AH-4. The antenna indicator in the LCD displays ANT1(EXT) when the AH-4 is connected and selected. AH-4 setting example:
For mobile operation Optional AH-2b antenna element For outdoor operation Long wire AH-4 operation Tuning is required for each frequency. Be sure to re-tune the antenna before transmitting when you change the frequency even slightly. q Set the desired frequency in an HF or 50 MHz band for use with the AH-4. The AH-4 will not operate on frequencies outside of ham bands. w Push [TUNER] for 1 sec. The indicator on the switch blinks while tuning. TUNER R DANGER: HIGH VOLTAGE!
NEVER touch the antenna element while tuning or transmitting. NEVER operate the AH-4 without an antenna wire. The tuner and transceiver will be damaged. NEVER operate the AH-4 when it is not grounded. Transmitting before tuning may damage the trans-
ceiver. Note that the AH-4 cannot tune when using a long wire or multiple of the operating frequency. e The indicator on the switch lights constantly when tuning is complete. When the connected wire cannot be tuned, the indicator on the switch goes out and the AH-4 is bypassed. At that point the antenna wire connec-
tion is to the transceiver directly, and not via the AH-4 antenna tuner. r To bypass the AH-4 manually, push [TUNER].
If the tuner cannot tune the antenna Check the following and try again:
the [ANT] connector selection. the antenna connection and feedline. the untuned antenna SWR. (Less than 3:1 for HF bands; Less than 2.5:1 for 50 MHz band) the transmit power. (8 W for HF bands; 15 W for 50 MHz band) the power source voltage/capacity.
Tuning a narrow bandwidth antenna Some antennas, especially for the low bands, have a narrow bandwidth. These antennas may not be tuned beyond the edge of their operating bandwidth, there-
fore, tune such an antenna as follows:
[Example]: Suppose you have an antenna which has an SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1 at 3.8 MHz. If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1 after checking the above, perform the following:
repeat manual tuning several times. tune with a 50 dummy load and re-tune the an-
tenna. turn power OFF and ON. adjust the antenna feedline length. (This is effective for higher frequencies in some cases.) q Push [TUNER] to turn the antenna tuner ON. w Select CW mode. e Turn OFF the break-in function. (p. ??) r Push [TRANSMIT] to set to the transmit condition. t Set 3.55 MHz and key down. y Set 3.80 MHz and key down. u Push [TRANSMIT] to return to the receive condition. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 114 9 CLOCK AND TIMERS
Time set mode SET F-6 F-1 F-2 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial CLOCK TIME Date Sets the date. Time (Now) Sets the local time. The IC-7600 has a built-in calendar and 24-hour clock (accuracy 75 sec. per month) with daily power ON/OFF timer functions. Before operating these timer functions, set the current date and time. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select time set mode. r Push [CLOCK] (F-1) to select clock set mode. t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired item. y Rotate the main dial to set or select the desired value or condition. u Push [EXIT/SET] to exit time set mode. 2000 1 1 ( Sat ) z Push [ ] (F-3) to select between the year and the month/day, then rotate the main dial to select them. The date setting and DATE-set Push [SET] indica-
tion blink. x Push [SET] (F-5) to set the date. 1:23 z Rotate the main dial to set the local time. The time setting and TIME-set Push [SET] indication blink. x Push [SET] (F-5) to set the time. CLOCK2 Function Turns the CLOCK2 indicator ON and OFF. CLOCK2 is convenient to indicate UTC or other countrys local time, etc. ON ON : The CLOCK2 indicator is displayed below the local time indication. OFF : The CLOCK2 indicator does not display. CLOCK2 Offset Sets the desired off-set time period for CLOCK2 dis-
play within 24:00 to +24:00 in 5 min. steps. 0:00 Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default value. CLOCK2 Name Sets the desired 3-character name for CLOCK2. Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some sym-
bols (! # $ % & ? " ` ^ + . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } |
_ ~ @) and spaces can be used. The cursor under the 1st character blinks. UTC z Push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the name edit condition. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [abc] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or
[Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character. Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters. Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and symbols. Push [] (F-1) or [] (F-2) for cursor movement. Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. Push [SPACE] (F-4) to input a space. Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also 115 enter numerals. c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.
Daily timer setting TIMER TIME TIMER2 TIMER4 F-2 CLR F-4 SET F-6 F-1 F-3 F-5 EXIT/SET Main dial TIMER1 TIMER3 TIMER5 CLOCK AND TIMERS 9 The transceiver turns power ON and/or OFF automat-
ically on the specified day and time, with the specified frequency settings. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select time set mode. r Push [TIMER] (F-2) to select timer set mode. t Push one of [TIMER1] (F-1) to [TIMER5] (F-5) to select the desired timer. y Rotate the main dial to select the timer action ON and OFF. u Push [] (F-2) to select the DAY cell, then rotate the main dial to select the desired day of the week. Select not to specify the day of the week. The timer will function every day in this case. Once a day of the week is selected, push [CLR] (F-4) to select . i Push [] (F-2) to select the REPEAT cell, then rotate the main dial to select the repeat function ON and OFF. ON
: The timer functions every selected day of the week. (repeats) OFF : The timer does not repeat. o Push [] (F-2) to select the ON cell, then rotate the main dial to set the desired transceiver power ON time. When using power OFF timer only, push [CLR] (F-4) to select . This setting cannot be set when the power OFF timer is set to .
!0 Push [] (F-2) to select the OFF cell, then rotate the main dial to set the desired transceiver power OFF time. When using power ON timer only, push [CLR] (F-4) to select . This setting cannot be set when the power ON timer is set to .
!1 Push [] (F-2) to select the Mch cell, then rotate the main dial to select the desired memory channel number. If using the currently set VFO condition, push [CLR] (F-4) to select .
!2 Push [SET] (F-6) to set the timer.
!3 Repeat steps t to !2 to set other timers, if de-
The timer indicator appears. sired.
!4 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 116 9 CLOCK AND TIMERS
Setting sleep timer SET SLEEP F-6 The sleep timer turns the transceiver power OFF au-
tomatically after passing the set period. The timer can be set to 5120 min. in 5 min. steps. EXIT/SET Main dial F-2 F-4 TIMER TIME CLR The sleep timer function counts the minute units, and does not count the second units. For exam-
ple, when the sleep timer is started at 12:00 59, First one minute past for just 1 sec. The maximum error is therefore 59 sec. This is normal, not a mal-
function. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. e Push [TIME] (F-4) to select time set mode. r Push [TIMER] (F-2) to select clock set mode. t Push [SLEEP] (F-6) to select the sleep timer set condition. blinks. TIMERset Push [SET] blinks. Push [CLR] (F-4) to select to cancel the setting. y Set the desired time period using the main dial. u Push [SET] (F-6) to set the time. i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen. o The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel the setting. The timer indicator appears. after the sleep timer period elapses. The timer indicator blinks while beeping. Push [POWER] momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if desired. q Preset the daily timer as described on previously to turn the timer function ON. The timer indicator appears. w Push and hold [POWER] for 1 sec. to turn the power OFF. The indicator on this switch lights red when the timer function is ON. e When the set time arrives, the power is automati-
cally turned ON. r The transceiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after the power-off period elapses. The timer indicator blinks while beeping. Push [POWER] momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if desired. Timer action in the timer set screen must be se-
lected ON to enable timer operation, described in page ?? steps ?.
Timer operation TIMER POWER Timer indicator appears 117
Set mode description Set mode is used for programming infrequently changed values or conditions of functions. The IC-
7600 has a level set mode, display set mode, time set mode, accessory set mode, others set mode and USB-Memory set menu. D Set mode operation SET USB WIDE F-6 OTHERS F-5 F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 EXIT/SET Main dial LEVEL ACC DISP TIME SET MODE 10 q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects set mode menu screen. e Push [LEVEL] (F-1), [ACC] (F-2), [DISP] (F-3),
[TIME] (F-4), [OTHERS] (F-5) or [USB] (F-6) to enter the desired set mode. r For level, accessory, display and Others set mode, push [WIDE] (F-6) to toggle wide and normal screen. t Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the desired item, then rotate the main dial to adjust/select the desired value or condition. Pushing [ ] (F-3) operation may be necessary for some items. Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) select a default condition or value. y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 118 10 SET MODE D Screen arrangement Display set mode (p. ??) F-3 Set mode menu screen (p. ??) Time set mode (p. ??) F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-4 Level set mode (p. ??) Others set mode (p. ??) ACC set mode (p. ??) USB-Memory set menu (p. ??) F-5 F-2 F-6 119 SET MODE 10
Level set mode SSB RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in SSB mode. (default: OFF) NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items will be reset to default value, 0. Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) AM RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in AM mode. (default: OFF) NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items will be reset to default value, 0. Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in AM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in AM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) FM RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in FM mode. (default: OFF) NOTE: When this setting is active, below 2 items will be reset to default value, 0. Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in FM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in FM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 120 10 SET MODE
Level set mode (Continued) CW RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in CW mode. (default: OFF) RTTY RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in RTTY mode. (default: OFF) PSK RX HPF/LPF Sets the low-pass filter (100 to 2000 Hz) and high-
pass filter (500 to 2400 Hz) of the receive audio in 100 Hz steps in PSK mode. (default: OFF) SSB TX Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in SSB mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) AM TX Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in AM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in AM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) FM TX Tone (Bass) Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in FM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) Tone (Treble) Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in FM mode from 5 to +5. (default: 0) 121 0 0 0 0 0 0 SET MODE 10 SSB TBW (WIDE) 100 2900 Sets the transmission passband width to a wide setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies. Lower freq. : 100 (default), 200, 300 and 500 Hz Higher freq. : 2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz (default) SSB TBW (MID) 300 2700 Sets the transmission passband width to a middle setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies. Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 (default) and 500 Hz Higher freq. : 2500, 2700 (default), 2800 and 2900 Hz SSB TBW (NAR) 500 2500 Sets the transmission passband width to a narrow setting by changing the lower and higher cut-off fre-
quencies. Lower freq. : 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz (default) Higher freq. : 2500 (default), 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz Drive Gain Sets the drive gain level from 0% to 100% in 1%
steps. (default: 50%) While talking into the microphone, keying down or transmitting, rotate the main dial so that the ALC meter reading is between 30% to 50% of the ALC scale. (p. ??) The drive gain is active for all modes other than SSB mode with speech compressor OFF. Speech Level Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%) Side Tone Level Sets the side tone output level from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%) 50%
50%
50%
Side Tone Level Limit ON Turns the side tone output level limiting capability ON and OFF. (default: ON) When this item is set to ON, the CW side tone is linked to the [AF] control until rotation of the [AF]
control reaches to the specified levelfurther rota-
tion will not increase the volume of the CW side tones. ON : CW side tone level is limited with the [AF]
control. OFF : CW side tone level is linked to the [AF] con-
trol. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 122 10 SET MODE
Level set mode (Continued) Beep Level Sets the key-touch beep output level from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%) 50%
Beep Level Limit ON Turns the beep tone output level limiting capability ON and OFF for the confirmation and band edge beep tones. (default: ON) When this item is set to ON, the beep tones are linked to the [AF] control until rotation of the [AF]
control reaches to the specified levelfurther rota-
tion will not increase the volume of the beep tones. ON : Beep level is limited with the [AF] control. OFF : Beep level is linked to the [AF] control. 123 SET MODE 10
ACC set mode USB Audio SQL Sets the squelch condition of the USB audio which is output from the [USB] (B) connector on the rear panel. The same audio signals are output from [USB] (B) and the ACC sockets. The beep tones and the voice synthesizer announce-
ments are not output. The received audio output level cannot be adjusted with the [AF] control. USB MOD Level Sets the input modulation level of the [USB] (B) con-
nector from 0% to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%) OFF (OPEN) OFF (OPEN) : The received audio is always output regardless of the squelch condition.
(default)
: The received audio is output ac-
cording to the squelch condition
(open/close). ON 50%
DATA OFF MOD MIC,ACC Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input when data mode is not in use. MIC ACC MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
: Use the signals from [MIC].
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4). USB
(pin 4). (default)
: Use the signals from [USB] (B). DATA1 MOD Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input when data 1 mode (D1) is in use. ACC MIC ACC
: Use the signals from [MIC].
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4).
(default) MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
USB
(pin 4).
: Use the signals from [USB] (B). DATA2 MOD MIC,ACC Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input when data 2 mode (D2) is in use. DATA3 MOD Selects the desired connector(s) for modulation input when data 3 mode (D3) is in use. MIC ACC MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
: Use the signals from [MIC].
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4). USB
(pin 4). (default)
: Use the signals from [USB] (B). MIC MIC ACC MIC,ACC : Use the signals from [MIC] and [ACC1]
: Use the signals from [MIC]. (default)
: Use the signals from [ACC1] (pin 4). USB
(pin 4).
: Use the signals from [USB] (B). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 124 10 SET MODE
ACC set mode (Continued) SEND Relay Type Selects the switching relay type for [RELAY] from Lead and MOSFET. Select the suitable relay type when connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier. External Meter Output Selects the desired item for an external meter indi-
cation. Lead Lead
: Use mechanical relay.
(16 V DC/0.5 A max.; default) MOS-FET : Use semiconductor type relay.
(250 V/200 mA max.) Auto Auto S Po
: Outputs the receiving signal strength level during receive, and outputs the selected level (selected with [METER]), during transmit. (default)
: Outputs the receiving signal strength level during receive.
: Outputs the transmitting power level dur-
ing transmit.
: Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.
: Outputs the ALC level during transmit. SWR ALC COMP : Outputs the compression level during VD ID transmit.
: Outputs the drain terminal voltage of the final amplifier MOSFETs.
: Outputs the drain current of the final am-
plifier MOSFETs. External Meter Level Sets the output level for an external meter indication with in 0% to 100% range in 1% steps. Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) setting for full-scale indi-
cation. (4.7 k impedance) REF Adjust Adjusts the internal reference signal frequency within 0% to 100% range in 1% steps during fre-
quency calibration. NOTE: Default setting is different for each trans-
ceiver. 50%
50%
125 SET MODE 10 50%
80
Display set mode Bright (LCD) Adjusts the LCD unit brightness from 0% (dark) to 100% (bright) range in 1% steps. (default: 50%) Backlight (Switches) Adjusts the switch indicators brightness from 1
(dark) to 100 (bright) range in 1 steps. (default: 80) Display Type Selects the desired display type from A (Black back) and B (Blue back). (default: A) A See p.?? for details. Display Font Selects the desired font for frequency readout from Basic, Italic and Round. (default: Basic) Basic See p.?? for details. Meter Response Set meter needle response from SLOW, MID and FAST. (default: MID) This setting is effective for the standard and edge-
wise meter type selections only. MID Meter Type (Normal Screen) Selects the desired S/RF meter type during normal screen indication from Standard, Edgewise and Bar.
(default: Standard) Standard Meter Type (Wide Screen) Selects the desired S/RF meter type during wide screen or mini scope indication from Edgewise and Bar. (default: Bar) Meter Peak Hold (Bar) Turns the meter peak hold function ON and OFF.
(default: ON) This function is used for the bar meter only. Bar ON Memory Name Sets the memory name indication, during memory mode operation, ON and OFF. (default: ON) ON ON
: The programmed memory name is dis-
played above the frequency indication. OFF : No memory name is displayed even a mem-
ory name is programmed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 126 10 SET MODE
Display set mode (Continued) APFWide Popup (APF OFFON) Selects the pop-up display for the APF filter width from ON and OFF. (default: ON) MNQ Popup (MN OFFON) Enables the pop-up indication capability when the notch filter width is changed from ON to OFF.
(default: ON) Screen Saver Function Turns the screen saver function ON (15, 30 or 60 minutes) and OFF. (default: 60 min.) The screen saver will activate when no operation is performed for the selected time period to protect the LCD from the burn-in effect. Screen Saver Type Selects the screen saver type from Bound, Rotation and Twist. (default: Bound) The screen saver indication can be displayed for your reference while pushing and holding
[PREVIEW] (F-5). ON ON 60min Bound Opening Message Turns the opening message screen indication capa-
bility ON and OFF. (default: ON) ON My Call Sets the introductory text, up to 10-character long, displayed in the opening screen. Usually, you set your call sign for the opening screen. Capital letters, numerals, some symbols ( / . @) and spaces can be used. When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the call sign can also be edited from the keyboard. In this case, an USB hub is required. 127 z Push [EDIT] (F-5) to select the name edit condi-
tion. The cursor under the 1st character blinks. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character. Push [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to toggle numerals and symbols. Push [] (F-1) or [] (F-2) for cursor movement. Push [DEL] (F-3) to delete the selected character. Push [SPACE] (F-4) to input a space. Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also enter numerals. c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.
Others set mode Calibration Marker This item is used for a simple frequency check of the transceiver. (default: OFF) See p. ?? for calibration procedure. NOTE: Turn the calibration marker OFF after checking the frequency of the transceiver. Beep (Conrmation) A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to confirm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent operation. (default: ON) The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. ??) Beep (Band Edge) A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits an amateur band. This functions indepen-
dent of the confirmation beep setting (above). The beep output level can be set in level set mode.
(p. ??) SET MODE 10 OFF ON
: Band edge beep OFF ON (Default) OFF ON (Default) : Band edge beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits a default amateur band. (default)
: A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits an ama-
teur band that is set in BAND EDGE screen. (p. ??) ON (User) ON (User) & TX Limit
: A beep sounds when an operating frequency enters or exits an ama-
teur band that is set in BAND EDGE screen and TX is limited out of the band. (p. ??) Beep Sound Sets the desired key-touch beep frequency within 500 to 2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps. (default: 1000 Hz) 1000Hz RF/SQL Control The [RF/SQL] control can be set as the RF/squelch control (default), the squelch control only (RF gain is fixed at maximum) or Auto (RF gain control in SSB, CW and RTTY; squelch control in AM and FM). See pgs. ??, ?? for details. RF+SQL RF+SQL : [RF/SQL] control as RF/squelch control SQL AUTO
(default)
: [RF/SQL] control as squelch control
: [RF/SQL] control as RF gain control in SSB, CW and RTTY; squelch control in AM and FM Quick Dualwatch When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding
[DUALWATCH] for 1 sec. sets the sub readout fre-
quency to the main readout frequency and activates dualwatch operation. ON OFF : Quick dualwatch OFF ON : Quick dualwatch ON (default) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 128 10 SET MODE
Others set mode (Continued) Quick SPLIT When this item is set to ON, pushing and holding
[SPLIT] for 1 sec. sets the unselected VFOs readout frequency to the selected VFOs readout frequency and activates split operation. (default: ON) ON See p. ?? for details. FM SPLIT Offset (HF) Sets the offset (difference between transmit and receive frequencies) for the quick split function. This setting is used for HF bands in FM mode only and is used to input the repeater offset for an HF band. The offset frequency can be set from 9.999 to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: 0.100 MHz) FM SPLIT Offset (50M) Sets the offset (difference between transmit and re-
ceive frequencies) for the quick split function. This setting is used for 50 MHz band FM mode only, and is used to input the repeater offset for the 50 MHz band. The offset frequency can be set from 9.999 to
+9.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps. (default: 0.500 MHz) 0.100MHz 0.500MHz SPLIT LOCK When this item is ON, the main dial can be used to adjust the transmit frequency while pushing [XFC]
even while the lock function is activated.
(default: OFF) See pgs. ??, ?? for split frequency operation details. OFF Tuner (Auto Start) The internal antenna tuner has an automatic start capability which starts tuning if the SWR is higher than 1.53:1. OFF OFF : The tuner remains OFF even when the ON SWR is poor (1.53:1). (default)
: Automatic tune starts even when the tuner is turned OFF during HF bands operation. Tuner (PTT Start) Tuning of the internal antenna tuner can be started automatically at the moment the PTT is pushed after the operating frequency is changed (more than 1%
from last-tuned frequency). (default: OFF) OFF 129 SET MODE 10 Tuner Preset Memory Clear The preset memory* of the selected antenna can be cleared with pushing [CLR] (F-5).
* The variable capacitor settings are memorized as a preset point for each frequency range (100 kHz steps) after the tuner matches an antenna.
<Select>
ANT1 Push [CLR] : The preset memory of the antenna that is connected to
[ANT 1] is cleared after push-
ing [CLR] (F-5). ANT2 Push [CLR] : The preset memory of the antenna that is connected to
[ANT 2] is cleared after push-
ing [CLR] (F-5).
[ANT] Switch You can set the antenna connector selection to automatic, manual or non-selection (when using 1 antenna only). Auto Auto
: Antenna switch is activated and the band memory memorizes the selected an-
tenna. (default) See p. ?? for details. Manual : Antenna switch is activated and selects OFF an antenna manually.
: Antenna switch is not activated and does not function. The [ANT1] connector is al-
ways selected. Transverter Function Selects the transverter operation condition from Auto and ON. (default: Auto) Auto ON Auto
: Turn the transverter operation ON.
: The transceiver turns into transverter op-
eration condition when 2 to 13.8 V DC is applied to [ACC2] pin 6. Transverter Offset Sets the desired offset frequency for the transverter operation within 0.000 to 99.999 MHz in 1 kHz steps.
(default: 16.000 MHz) RTTY Mark Frequency Selects the RTTY mark frequency. RTTY mark frequency is switched between 1275, 1615 and 2125 Hz. (default: 2125 Hz) 2125 Hz is automatically selected when the internal RTTY decoder is used. RTTY Shift Width Selects the RTTY shift width. There are 3 selectable values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz) 170 Hz is automatically selected when the internal RTTY decoder is used. 16.000MHz (14.100.030.100.0) 2125 170 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 130 10 SET MODE
Others set mode (Continued) RTTY Keying Polarity Selects the RTTY keying polarity. Normal or reverse keying polarity can be selected. (default: Normal) Normal Normal
: Key open/close = Mark/Space Reverse : Key open/close = Space/Mark When reverse polarity is selected, Mark and Space are reversed. PSK Tone Frequency Selects the desired PSK tone frequency for the PSK reception from 1000, 1500 and 2000 Hz.
(default: 1500 Hz) 1500 SPEECH Language Selects the speech language from English and Japanese. (default: English) English SPEECH Speed Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and LOW (slower). (default: HIGH) HIGH SPEECH S-Level The IC-7600 speech processor can announce fre-
quency, mode and signal level. Signal level an-
nouncement can be deactivated if desired.
(default: ON) When OFF is selected, the signal level is not an-
nounced. SPEECH [MODE] Switch Selects the operating mode speech capability when a mode switch is pushed; ON or OFF.
(default: OFF) When ON is selected, the selected operating mode is announced when a mode switch is pushed. ON OFF
[SPEECH/LOCK] Switch Selects the [SPEECH/LOCK] switch action. SPEECH/LOCK SPEECH/LOCK : (Push) The voice synthesizer function is activated.
(Push and hold) The dial lock function is turned ON or OFF. LOCK/SPEECH : (Push) The dial lock function is turned ON or OFF.
(Push and hold) The voice syn-
thesizer function is activated. 131 SET MODE 10 Memopad Numbers Sets the number of memo pad channels available. 5 or 10 memo pads can be selected. (default: 5) 5 MAIN DIAL Auto TS Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial. When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning step automatically changes several times as selected. HIGH HIGH : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Fastest tun-
ing step during rapid rotation. (default) LOW : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Faster tun-
There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH
(Fastest) and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH) OFF ing step during rapid rotation.
: Auto tuning step is turned OFF. MIC Up/Down Speed Sets the rate at which frequencies are scanned when the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches are pushed and held. HIGH or LOW can be selected. HIGH HIGH : High speed (default; 50 tuning steps/sec.) LOW : Low speed (25 tuning steps/sec.) Quick RIT/TX Clear Selects the RIT/TX frequency clearing instruction with [CLEAR].
[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) Selects notch functions for SSB mode operation from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual.
[NOTCH] Switch (AM) Selects notch functions for AM mode operation from Auto, Manual and Auto/Manual. SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning Selects the displayed frequency shift function from ON and OFF. (default: OFF) When this function is activated, the audio pitch or tones of the received signal will remain the same even when the operating mode is changed between SSB and CW. The amount of frequency shift may differ accord-
ing to the CW pitch setting. OFF ON : Clears the RIT/TX frequency when [CLEAR]
is pushed momentarily. OFF : Clears the RIT/TX frequency when [CLEAR]
is pushed and held for 1 sec. (default) Auto/Manual
: Only the auto notch can be used. Auto Manual
: Only the manual notch can be used. Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can be used. (default) Auto/Manual Auto
: Only the auto notch can be used. Manual
: Only the manual notch can be used. Auto/Manual : Both the auto and manual notch can be used. (default) OFF ON : The displayed frequency shifts when the op-
erating mode is changed between SSB and CW. OFF : The displayed frequency does not shift. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 132 10 SET MODE
Others set mode (Continued) CW Normal Side Selects the side band used to receive CW in CW normal mode. (default: LSB) LSB APF Type Select audio filter shape for APF from SOFT and SHARP. (default: SOFT) SOFT SOFT
: Soft filter shape makes distinguishing noise and signals easier. The audio filter width is related to the CW pitch setting. SHARP : Sharp filter shape rejects interfering sig-
nals more aggressively. External Keypad (VOICE) Sets the external keypad for voice message trans-
mission capability ON and OFF. (default: OFF) See page ?? for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection. External Keypad (KEYER) Sets the external keypad for keyer memory trans-
mission capability ON and OFF. (default: OFF) See page ?? for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection. External Keypad (RTTY) Sets the external keypad for RTTY TX memory transmission capability ON and OFF. (default: OFF) See page ?? for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection. External Keypad (PSK) Sets the external keypad for PSK TX memory trans-
mission capability ON and OFF. (default: OFF) See page ?? for the equivalent circuit of an external keypad and connection. OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
: Pushing one of external keypad switches, transmits the desired voice message con-
tents during a phone mode operation.
: External keypad does not function.
: Pushing one of external keypad switches, transmits the desired keyer memory con-
tents during CW mode operation.
: External keypad does not function.
: Pushing one of external keypad switches, transmits the desired RTTY TX memory contents during RTTY mode operation.
: External keypad does not function.
: Pushing one of external keypad switches, transmits the desired PSK TX memory contents during PSK mode operation.
: External keypad does not function. 133 SET MODE 10
: Pushing one of [F-1][F-4] key of the con-
nected keyboard transmits the desired voice message contents during a phone mode operation.
: [F-1][F-4] key of the connected key-
board does not function.
: Pushing one of [F-1][F-4] key of the con-
nected keyboard transmits the desired keyer memory contents during CW mode operation.
: [F-1][F-4] key of the connected key-
board does not function. Keyboard [F-1][F-4] (VOICE) Sets the voice message transmission capability ON and OFF when one of [F-1][F-4] key of the key-
board that is connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the front panel is pushed. (default: OFF) Keyboard [F-1][F-4] (KEYER) Sets the keyer memory transmission capability ON and OFF when one of [F-1][F-4] key of the key-
board that is connected to the [USB] (A) connector on the front panel is pushed. (default: OFF) CIV Baud Rate Sets the CI-V data transfer rate. 300, 1200, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps and Auto are available.
(default: Auto) When Auto is selected, the baud rate is auto-
matically set according to the data rate of connected controller. CIV Address To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver has its own Icom standard address in hexadecimal code. The IC-7600s address is 7Ah. When 2 or more IC-7600s are connected to an op-
tional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER, rotate the main dial to select a different address for each IC-7600;
the range is 01h to 7Fh. CIV Transceive Transceive operation is possible with the IC-7600 connected to other Icom HF transceivers or receivers. When ON is selected, changing the frequency, operating mode, etc. on the IC-7600 automatically changes those of connected transceivers (or receiv-
ers) and vice versa. OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF Auto 7Ah ON USB Serial Function Select [USB] connector output data format from CI-V and Decode. CI-V CI-V Decode : Outputs decoded contents in ASCII code
: Outputs data in CI-V format. (default) format. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 134 10 SET MODE
Others set mode (Continued) Decode Baud Rate Selects data transmission speed (Baud rate) when Decode is selected in USB Serial Function; set-
tings are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.
(default: 9600) 9600 Keyboard Type Selects the connected keyboard type from English, Japanese, United Kingdom, French, French
(Canadian), German, Portuguese, Portuguese
(Brazilian), Spanish, Spanish (Latin American) and Italian. (default: Japanese) Keyboard Repeat Delay Sets the time period for delay from 100 to 1000 msec. in 50 msec. steps. (default: 250 msec.) When a key of the connected keyboard is pushed and held for the set period, the character is input continuously. Keyboard Repeat Rate Sets the repeating rate for the connected keyboard within 2.0 to 30.0 cps. (default: 10.9 cps)
*cps=character per second When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed and held, the character is repeatedly input with the set speed. Japanese 250ms 10.9cps Available repeating rate 2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7, 3.0, 3.3, 3.7, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.0, 8.6, 9.2, 10.0, 10.9, 12.0, 13.3, 15.0, 16.0, 17.1, 18.5, 20.0, 21.8, 24.0, 26.7, 30.0 135 SET MODE 10
USB-Memory set menu D USB-Memory set screen arrangement USB-Memory set menu The USB-Memory is not supplied by Icom. F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 Setting load screen (p. ??) Firmware update (p. ??) F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-3 Push and hold for 1 sec. Load option set mode (p. ??) Format menu (p. ??) Setting save screen (p. ??) Unmount USB-Memory (p. ??) F-4 2
-
F F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-5 Save option set mode (p. ??) Push and hold for 1 sec. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 136 10 SET MODE D Load option set mode Load Contents Selects le load condition from All and Select.
(default: Select) Select All
: Loads and sets the all following contents. Select : Loads and sets the selected contents only. ANT Memory Selects the antenna memory setting loading condi-
tion from YES and NO. (default: NO) REF Adjust Selects the reference signal setting load condition from YES and NO. (default: NO) CIV Address NO YES NO NO YES NO NO
: Loads and sets the antenna memory.
: Use the original antenna memory setting.
: Loads and sets the reference signal setting.
: Use the original reference signal setting. Selects the IP address setting load condition from YES and NO. (default: NO) YES NO
: Loads and sets the IP address setting.
: Use the original IP address setting. Other Memory & Settings This setting is xed YES. Voice TX Memory Selects the voice TX message load condition from YES and NO. (default: YES) Voice RX Memory Selects the voice RX message load condition from YES and NO. (default: NO) YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO
: Loads and sets memory channel contents and other settings.
: Loads and sets voice TX message.
: Use the original voice TX message.
: Loads and sets voice RX message.
: Use the original voice RX message. 137 SET MODE 10 D Save option set mode SAVE Contents Selects le save condition from All and Select.
(default: All) All All
: Saves all the following contents. Select : Saves the selected contents only. Memory & Settings This setting is xed YES. Voice TX Memory Selects the voice TX message save condition from YES and NO. (default: YES) Voice RX Memory Selects the voice RX message save condition from YES and NO. (default: NO) YES YES YES YES NO NO YES NO
: Saves memory channel contents and set-
tings of set modes.
: Saves the voice TX message.
: Does not save.
: Saves the voice RX message.
: Does not save. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 138 10 SET MODE
File saving SAVE/OPT 123 Symbol ABC OK F-5 USB F-6 F-1 F-2 DIR/FILE SAVE F-4 EDIT EXIT/SET Main dial When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the le name can also be edited from the keyboard. In this case, an USB hub is required. Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc. can be saved into the USB-Memory for backup. q During set mode menu screen indication, push
[USB] (F-6) to select USB-Memory set menu screen. w Push [SAVE] (F-2) to select setting save screen. e Change the following conditions if desired. File name:
z Push [EDIT] (F-4) to select file name edit con-
dition. Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) several times to select the file name, if necessary. x Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol]
(MF7) to select the character group, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7):
0 to 9 (numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^
( ) { } _ ~ @ can be selected. Push [] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push []
(F-2) to move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3) to delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to insert a space. c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name. Save option z Push and hold [SAVE/OPT] (F-5) for 1 sec. to enter save option set mode. x Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select the item, then rotate the main dial to select the desired setting. (see p. ?? for details) Push and hold [DEF] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select the default setting. c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous in-
dication. Saving location z Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen. x Select the desired directory or folder in the USB-Memory. Push [ ] (F-4) to select the upper directory. Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select folder in the same directory. Push and hold [ ] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select a folder in the directory. Push [REN] (MF5) to rename the folder. Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. to delete the folder. Push and hold [MAKE] (MF7) for 1 sec. to making a new folder. (Edit the name with the same man-
ner as the File name above.) c Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) twice to select the file name. Confirmation screen appears. r Push [SAVE/OPT] (F-5). t Push [OK] (F-5) to save. After saving is completed, return to USB-Memory set 139 menu automatically.
File loading LOAD/OPT F-4 USB F-6 F-1 F-2 F-3 LOAD F-5 OK EXIT/SET Main dial SET MODE 10 By loading the saved setting file from the USB-
Memory, you can easily set up another IC-7600 several operators settings can easily be applied to one IC-7600. q During set mode menu screen indication, push
[USB] (F-6) to select USB set menu screen. w Push [LOAD] (F-1) to select setting load screen. e Push and hold [LOAD/OPT] (F-4) for 1 sec. to select load option set mode, then set the desired loading conditions, if desired. See page ?? for details. r Push [EXIT/SET] to set. t Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired setting file. Confirmation screen appears. y Push [LOAD/OPT] (F-4). u Push [OK] (F-5) to starts loading. After the loading is completed, the message dialog, Reboot the IC-7600, appears. i Turn the transceiver power OFF then ON to make the setting effective. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 140 10 SET MODE
Changing a le name 123 Symbol REN ABC F-1 F-2 F-3 EXIT/SET Main dial DIR/FILE The file name, saved in the USB-Memory, can be re-
named from the transceiver as desired. q During setting save screen indication, push
[DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen. Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired folder. DECODE, SETTING and VOICE folders are avail-
able as the default. After the folder is selected, push and hold [ ] (F-4) for 1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available. w Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select file list screen. e Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired file. r Push [REN] (MF5) momentarily to select the file name edit condition. t Push [ABC] (MF6), [123] (MF7) or [Symbol] (MF7) to select the character group, then rotate the main dial to select the character.
[ABC] (MF6): A to Z (capital letters); [123] (MF7): 0 to 9
(numerals); [Symbol] (MF7): ! # $ % & ` ^ ( ) { } _ ~
@ can be selected. Push [] (F-1) to move the cursor left, push [] (F-2) to move the cursor right, push [DEL] (F-3) to delete a character and push [SPACE] (F-4) to insert a space. Pushing the transceivers keypad, [0][9], can also enter numerals. y Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name. When a PC keyboard is connected to [USB] con-
nector on the front panel, the le name can also be edited from the keyboard. In this case, an USB hub is required. 141
Deleting a le DEL F-1 F-2 F-3 DIR/FILE F-5 OK SET MODE 10 RECOMMENDATION! Deleting the setting file is ir-
reversible. Confirm the contents before deleting a setting file!
q During setting save screen indication, push
[DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select tree view screen. Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired folder. DECODE, SETTING and VOICE folders are avail-
able as the default. After the folder is selected, push and hold [ ] (F-4) for 1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available. w Push [DIR/FILE] (F-1) to select file list screen. e Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the desired file to be deleted. Confirmation screen appears. r Push and hold [DEL] (MF6) for 1 sec. t Push [OK] (F-5) to delete. After the deleting, return to setting save screen auto-
matically.
Unmounting USB-Memory CAUTION! When removing the USB-Memory, un-
mount operation is recommended. If you do not unmount the memory in this case, data in the USB memory may be corrupted. q During USB-Memory set menu screen indication, push and hold [UNMOUNT] (F-5) for 1 sec. Confirmation screen appears. w Push [OK] (F-5) to unmount the USB-Memory. e After the indicator above [USB] (A) connector goes off, remove the USB-Memory. F-5 UNMOUNT OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 142 10 SET MODE
Formatting the USB-Memory Saved data in the USB-Memory can be erased. IMPORTANT! Formatting erases all saved data in the USB-Memory. Making a backup file on your PC is recommended. q During USB-Memory set menu screen indication, push and hold [FORMAT] (F-4) for 1 sec. Confirmation screen appears. w Push [FAT] (F-5) or [FAT32] (F-6) to select the for-
mat type, FAT or FAT32, respectively. Confirmation screen appears. e Push [OK] (F-5) to format. r Returns to USB-Memory set menu indication auto-
Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel. matically. NOTE: If no USB-Memory is inserted and
[FORMAT] (F-4) is selected as in step q, an error message appears as below. MMM NO USB-MEMORY IS FOUND MMM Check the following:
Insert a USB-Memory The USB-Memory type 143 MAINTENANCE 11
Troubleshooting The following chart is designed to help you correct problems which are not equipment malfunctions. If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or solve it through the use of this chart, contact you nearest Icom Dealer or Service Center. D Transceiver power PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Power does not come on when the [POWER] switch is pushed. Power cable is improperly connected. The internal power supply is turned OFF. Circuit breaker is tripped. Re-connect the AC power cable correctly. Turn the internal power supply ON. Check for the cause, then re-set the circuit breaker. D Transmit and receive PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION No sounds from the speaker. Volume level is too low. Rotate [AF] clockwise to obtain a suitable lis-
REF. p. ??
p. ??
REF. p. ??
The squelch is closed. Turn [SQL] to 10 oclock position to open the p. ??
tening level. The transceiver is in transmit. squelch. Push [TRANSMIT] to receive or check the p. ??
SEND line of an external unit, if connected. Sensitivity is too low, and only strong signals are audible. The antenna is not connected properly. The antenna for another band is selected. Re-connect to the antenna connector. Select an antenna suitable for the operating p. ??
The antenna is not properly tuned. Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually The attenuator is activated. Push [ATT] (MF4) several times to select ATT tune the antenna. frequency. OFF. Received audio is unclear or distorted. Wrong operating mode is selected. PBT function is activated. Select a suitable operating mode. Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to reset p. ??
Noise blanker is turned ON when receiving a Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker OFF. the function. strong signal. Preamp is activated. Push [P.AMP] (MF3) once or twice to turn the function OFF. The noise reduction is activated and the [NR]
Set the [NR] control for maximum readability. control is too far clockwise. The antenna switch has not been activated. Set the antenna switch in set mode to Auto p. ??
or Manual. The operating frequency is not inside a ham Set the frequency to be in a ham band. band.
[RF PWR] is set too far counterclockwise
[DRIVE] is set too far counterclockwise
[MIC] is set too far counterclockwise The antenna for another band is selected. Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise. Set [DRIVE] to a suitable position. Set [MIC] to a suitable position. Select an antenna suitable for the operating frequency. The antenna is not properly tuned. Push and hold [TUNER] for 1 sec. to manually RIT or TX function is activated. Split frequency function is activated.
[MIC] is set too far clockwise tune the antenna. Push [RIT] or [TX] to turn the function OFF. Push [SPLIT] to turn the function OFF. Set [MIC] to a suitable position. Split frequency function is not activated. Programmed subaudible tone frequency is Push [SPLIT] to to turn the function ON Reset the frequency using set mode. wrong. p. ??
p. ??
p. ??
p. ??
p. ??
The [ANT] switch does not function Transmitting is impossible. Output power is too low. No contact can be made with another station. Transmit signal is unclear or distorted. Repeater cannot be ac-
cessed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 144 11 MAINTENANCE D Scanning PROBLEM Programmed scan does not stop. Programmed scan does not start. Memory scan does not start POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Squelch is open. Set [SQL] to the threshold point. REF. p. ??
The same frequencies have been programmed Program different frequencies in scan edge p. ??
in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2. memory channel P1 and P2. 2 or more memory channels have not been Program more than 2 memory channels. p. ??
programmed. Select memory scan does not start 2 or more memory channels have not been Designate more than 2 memory channels as p. ??
designated as select channels. select channels for the scan. D Display PROBLEM The displayed frequency does not change properly. POSSIBLE CAUSE The dial lock function is activated. A set mode screen is selected. The internal CPU has malfunctioned. SOLUTION Push [LOCK] to turn the function OFF. Push [EXIT/SET] several times to exit the set mode screen. Reset the CPU. D Format USB-Memory PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION Format error appears when formatting in FAT32 Format error appears when formatting in FAT The inserted USB-Memory capacity is smaller Insert a USB-Memory larger than 64 MB or than 64 MB. select the FAT format. The inserted USB-Memory capacity is larger Insert a USB-Memory smaller than 2 GB or p. ??
than 2 GB. select the FAT32 format. REF. p. ??
REF. p. ??
Main dial brake adjustment The tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit your preference. The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of the front panel. See the figure at left. Slide the brake adjustment to a comfortable tension level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in one direction. Main dial Brake adjustment Light Heavy 145 MAINTENANCE 11
SWR reading The SWR meter indicates the SWR over the trans-
mission line in all modes. q Push [TUNER] to turn the antenna tuner OFF. w Push and hold [METER] (MF2) for 1 sec. to display multi-function meter. e Push [RTTY/PSK] once or twice to select RTTY mode. r Push [TRANSMIT]. t Rotate [RF POWER] clockwise past the 12 oclock position for more than 30 W output power. y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage. u Push [EXIT/SET] to close multi-function meter. TRANSMIT TUNER
[METER]
[RF POWER]
RTTY/PSK The built-in antenna tuner matches the transmitter to the antenna when the SWR is lower than 3 : 1. Better than 1.5:1
Screen type and font selections 2 types of screen images and 3 types of frequency readout indication fonts are available in the IC-7600. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multi-func-
tion screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. e Push [DISP] (F-3) to enter display set mode. r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to select Display Type item when selecting the screen image, se-
lect Display Font when selecting the frequency readout indication font. t Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen image or font. Screen image is selectable from A (Black back) and B
(Blue back). Basic, Italic and Round are available for the frequency readout font. y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit from display set mode. SET F-6 F-1 F-2 F-3 DISP F-4 DEF EXIT/SET
[DIAL]
Screen image example Display Type: B, Display Font: Italic 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 146 11 MAINTENANCE
Frequency calibration (approximate) A very accurate frequency counter is required to calibrate the frequency of the transceiver. However, a rough check may be performed by receiving radio station WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency signals. CAUTION: The IC-7600 has been thoroughly ad-
justed and tested at the factory before being shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it. q Push [SSB] to select USB mode. w Push and hold [PBT-CLR] for 1 sec. to clear the PBT setting and make sure that the RIT/TX func-
tion is not activated. e Set the frequency to the standard frequency station minus 1 kHz. When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for 14.99900 MHz. Other standard frequencies can be used. r Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. t Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. y Push [OTHERS] (F-5) to enter others set mode. u Push [Y] (F-1) several times to select the Calibration Marker item. i Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra-
tion marker ON. o Push [EXIT/SET] once to return to set mode menu screen.
!0 Push [ACC] (F-2) to enter accessory set mode.
!1 Push [Z] (F-2) several times to select the REF Adjust item.
!2 Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with the received standard signal as shown at right. Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.
!3 Turn the calibration marker OFF in others set mode.
!4 Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode. OTHERS F-5 SET F-6 PBT-CLR F-1 SSB F-2 EXIT/SET
[DIAL]
ACC
/
Calibration marker item REF Adjust item 147 MAINTENANCE 11 Carrying handle Top cover PA shielding plate Bottom cover
Opening the transceivers case Follow the case opening procedures shown here when you want to replace the clock backup battery or internal fuse. CAUTION!: Turn the power OFF and disconnect the DC power cable from the transceiver before performing any work on the transceiver. Otherwise, there is danger of electric shock and/or equipment damage. q Remove the two screws from the carrying handle-
and remove the handle from the transceiver. w Remove the 6 screws from the top of the trans-
ceiver and the 4 screws from the sides, then lift up the top cover. e Turn the transceiver upside-down. CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is being turned upside down. This may damage the transceiver. r Remove 6 screws from the bottom, then lift up the bottom cover.
Clock backup battery replacement The IC-7600 has a lithium backup battery (CR2032) inside for clock and timer functions. The usual life of the backup battery is approximately 2 years. When the backup battery is discharged, the trans-
ceiver transmits and receives normally but cannot retain the current time. WARNING: Turn the power OFF and disconnect the DC power cable from the transceiver before re-
moving the transceivers cover. q Remove the bottom cover as shown above. w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the front panel as illustrated at right. Make sure the battery polarity is correct. e Return the bottom cover to the original position. r Set the date and time in time set mode. (p. ??) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 148 11 MAINTENANCE
Fuse replacement If a fuse blows or the transceiver stops functioning, try to find the source of the problem, and replace the damaged fuse with a new, adequately rated fuse. WARNING: Turn the power OFF and disconnect the DC power cable from the transceiver before re-
moving the transceivers cover. D DC power cable fuse replacement Refer the figure illustrated at right for the DC power cable fuse replacement. D Circuitry fuse replacement The 13.8 V DC from the DC power cable is applied to all units in the IC-7600, except for the power ampli-
fier, through the circuitry fuse. This fuse is installed in the PA unit. q Remove the to top cover as shown left. w Remove the 11 screws, then remode the bottom cover and the PA shielding plate as shown at right. e Replace the circuitry fuse as shown in the diagram as at right. r Replace the PA shielding plate, top cover and screws to their original position.
Resetting the CPU q Turn the transceiver power OFF in advance. w While pushing and holding [F-INP ENT] and [MW], push [POWER] to turn power ON. The internal CPU is reset. The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec. The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies when resetting is complete. e Correct the set mode settings after resetting, if de-
sired. NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-
tents in memory channels and returns programmed values in set mode to default values. The IC-7600 has two fuses (DC power cable fuses) installed for transceiver protection. DC power cable fuses .............................. ATC 30 A Circuitry fuse .............................................. ATC 5 A ATC 30 A fuse PA shielding plate ATC 5 A fuse POWER MW F-INP ENT 149 i7600 ALL CLEAR
About protection indications The IC-7600 has a 2-step protection function to pro-
tect the final power amplifiers. The protector monitors the power amplifier tempera-
ture and activates when the temperature becomes extremely high. Power down transmission Reduces the transmit output power to 100 W. LMT appears beside the transmit indicator during transmit. Transmission inhibit Deactivates the transmitter. The transmit indicator is displayed in gray during transmit. When the protector is activated, wait until the power amplifier cools down using the transceiver in stand-by or receive condition. NOTE: DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF when the protector is ON. If you do, the cooling fan will not function and it will take longer to cool the transceiver. The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in the multi-function meter, TEMP gauge.
Screen saver function The IC-7600 has a screen saver function to protect the LCD from the burn-in effect. q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. w Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. e Push [DISP] (F-3) to enter display set mode. r Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) several times to select the Screen Saver Function item. t Rotate the main dial to select the desired time period for the screen saver activation from 15, 30, 60 min. and OFF. Deactivate the screen saver with OFF selection. y Push [Z] (F-2) to select the Screen Saver Type item. u Rotate the main dial to select the screen saver type from Bound, Rotation and Twist. Push and hold [PREVIEW] (F-5) to display the indica-
tion for your reference. i Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode. MAINTENANCE 11 Check the temperature PREVIEW F-5 SET F-6 F-1 F-2 F-3 DISP EXIT/SET
[DIAL]
When Twist. is selected 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 150 12 CONTROL COMMAND
Remote jack (CI-V) information D CI-V connection example 915V DC RS-232C cable PC ct-17 The transceiver can be connected through an optional CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port. The Icom Communications Interface-V
(CI-V) controls the transceiver. Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be connected to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port. See p. 000 for setting the CI-V condition using set mode. IC-7600 mini-plug cable D Data format The CI-V system can be operated using the following data formats. Data formats differ according to com-
mand numbers. A data area or sub command is added for some commands. Controller to IC-7600 OK message to controller q w FE FE 7A e E0 r Cn t Sc y Data area u FD FE FE E0 7A FB FD l e b m a e r P
) d e x i f
(
e d o c i s r e v e c s n a r T s s e r d d a t l f u a e d s r e l l o r t n o C s s e r d d a t l f u a e d r e b m u n d n a m m o C l
) e b a t d n a m m o c e h t e e s
(
r e b m u n l
) e b a t d n a m m o c e e s
(
d n a m m o c b u S s a h c u s y r o m e m t a a d e d o c D C B
, y c n e u q e r f r o f y r t n e r e b m u n
) n o i t p i r c s e d t n e t n o c a t a d e e s
(
e g a s s e m f o d n E
) d e x i f
(
e d o c l e b m a e r P
) d e x i f
(
e d o c s r e l l o r t n o C s s e r d d a t l f u a e d i s r e v e c s n a r T s s e r d d a t l f u a e d
) d e x i f
(
e d o c K O e d o c G N
) d e x i f
(
e g a s s e m f o d n E
) d e x i f
(
e d o c FE FE E0 q w 7A e Cn r Sc t Data area y FD u FE FE E0 7A FA FD IC-7600 to controller NG message to controller 150 D Command table Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 B0 B1 C0 C1 D0 D1 09 0A 0B 0E 00 01 02 03 12 13 22 23 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 B0 B1 B2 D0 D3 00 01 0F see p. 000 Send frequency data (transceive) 00 01 02 03 04 05 07 08 12 13 Select LSB (transceive) Select USB (transceive) Select AM (transceive) Select CW (transceive) Select RTTY (transceive) Select FM (transceive) Select CW-R (transceive) Select RTTY-R (transceive) Select PSK (transceive) Select PSK-R (transceive) see p. 000 Read band edge frequencies see p. 000 Read operating frequency see p. 000 Read operating mode see p. 000 Set operating frequency 00 01 02 03 04 05 07 08 12 13 0001 to 0099 0100 0101 01 02 03 00 01 02 03 Select LSB Select USB Select AM Select CW Select RTTY Select FM Select CW-R Select RTTY-R Select PSK Select PSK-R Select VFO mode Exchange main and sub bands Equalize main and sub bands Turn the dualwatch OFF Turn the dualwatch ON Select main band Select sub band Select memory mode Select memory channel
(0001=M-CH01, 0099=M-CH99) Select program scan edge channel P1 Select program scan edge channel P2 Memory write Copying memory contents into VFO Memory clear Scan stop Programmed/memory scan start Programmed scan start
:F scan start Fine programmed scan start Fine :F scan start Memory scan start Select memory scan start Select :F scan span 5 kHz Select :F scan span 10 kHz Select :F scan span 20 kHz Select :F scan span 50 kHz Select :F scan span 100 kHz Select :F scan span 500 kHz Select :F scan span 1 MHz Set as non-select channel Set as select channel
( The previously set number by CI-V is set after turning power ON, or 1 is selected if no selec-
tion is performed.) Set as select channel 1 Set as select channel 2 Set as select channel 3 Set ALL for select memory scan Set 1 for select memory scan Set 2 for select memory scan Set 3 for select memory scan Set scan resume OFF Set scan resume ON Turn the split function OFF Turn the split function ON Cmd. Sub cmd. 10 11 12 13 14 15 00 01 02 01 02 03 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 12 14 15 16 17 19 01 02 11 12 13 14 CONTROL COMMAND 12 Data 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 00 06 12 18 0000 0001 0100 0101 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 00 01 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 Description Select 10 Hz (1 Hz) tuning step Select 100 Hz tuning step Select 1 kHz tuning step Select 5 kHz tuning step Select 9 kHz tuning step Select 10 kHz tuning step Select 12.5 kHz tuning step Select 20 kHz tuning step Select 25 kHz tuning step Send/read attenuator OFF Send/read 6 dB attenuator Send/read 12 dB attenuator Send/read 18 dB attenuator Send/read ANT1 selection (RX ANT OFF) Send/read ANT1 selection (RX ANT ON) Send/read ANT2 selection (RX ANT OFF) Send/read ANT2 selection (RX ANT ON) Announce all data with voice synthesizer Announce frequency and S-meter level with voice synthesizer Announce receive mode with voice synthesizer Send/read [AF] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW) Send/read [RF] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=11 o'clock) Send/read [SQL] level
(0000=11 o'clock, 0255=max. CW) Send/read [NR] level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read inner [TWIN PBT] position
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW) Send/read outer [TWIN PBT] position
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW) Send/read CW pitch
( 0000=300 Hz, 0128=600 Hz, 0255=900 Hz;
5 Hz steps) Send/read [RF POWER] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW) Send/read [MIC GAIN] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW) Send/read [KEY SPEED] level
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW) Send/read [NOTCH] position
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW) Send/read COMP level
(0000=0, 0255=10) Send/read [BK-IN DELAY] position
(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW) Send/read [BAL] position
(0000=max. CCW, 0128=center, 0255=max. CW) Send/read NB level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read DRIVE gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read Monitor gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read VOX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read Anti VOX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read BRIGHT level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Read squelch condition (squelch close) Read squelch condition (squelch open) Read S-meter level
(0000=S0, 0120=S9, 0241=S9+60) Read RF power meter
(0000=0, 0143=50, 0213=100) Read SWR meter
(0000=SWR1.0, 0048=SWR1.5, 0080=SWR2.0) Read ALC meter
(0000=0, 0120=Max.) Read COMP meter
(0000=0, 0130=15, 0241=30) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 151 12 CONTROL COMMAND D Command table (continued) Cmd. Sub cmd. Description 15 16 15 16 02 12 22 32 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 4F 50 19 00 1A 00 01 02 03 Data 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0255 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 02 03 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 Read VD meter
(0152=10, 0181=13, 0212=16) Read ID meter
(0000=0, 0097=10, 0241=25) Preamp OFF Preamp 1 ON Preamp 2 ON AGC FAST selection AGC MID selection AGC SLOW selection Noise blanker OFF Noise blanker ON Audio peak filter OFF Audio peak filter WIDE ON
(320 is selected when SHARP APF is set) Audio peak filter MID ON
(160 is selected when SHARP APF is set) Audio peak filter NAR ON
(80 is selected when SHARP APF is set) Noise reduction OFF Noise reduction ON Auto notch function OFF Auto notch function ON Repeater tone OFF Repeater tone ON Tone squelch OFF Tone squelch ON Speech compressor OFF Speech compressor ON Monitor function OFF Monitor function ON VOX function OFF VOX function ON BK-IN function OFF SEMI BK-IN function ON Full BK-IN function ON Manual notch function OFF Manual notch function ON Twin peak filter OFF Twin peak filter ON Dial lock function OFF Dial lock function ON Reads the transceiver ID see p. 000 Send/read memory contents see p. 000 Send/read band stacking register contents see p. 000 Send/read memory keyer contents 00 to 49 Send/read the selected filter width
( SSB, CW, PSK: 00=50 Hz, 40=3600 Hz;
RTTY: 00=50 Hz, 31=2700 Hz;
AM: 00=200 Hz, 49=10 kHz) 04 00 to 13 Send/read the selected AGC time constant
(00=OFF, 01=0.1/0.3 sec., 13=6.0/8.0 sec.) 05 0001 see p. 000 Send/read HPF/LPF setting for SSB RX audio 0002 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0003 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0004 see p. 000 Send/read HPF/LPF setting for AM RX audio 0005 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX tone (Bass) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0006 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0007 see p. 000 Send/read HPF/LPF setting for FM RX audio 0008 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX tone (Bass) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0009 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0010 see p. 000 Send/read HPF/LPF setting for CW RX audio 0011 see p. 000 Send/read HPF/LPF setting for RTTY RX audio 0012 see p. 000 Send/read HPF/LPF setting for PSK RX audio 0013 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0014 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 152 Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description 1A 05 0015 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0016 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0017 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0018 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble) level
(00=5, 10=+5) 0019 see p. 000 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for WIDE 0020 see p. 000 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for MID. 0021 see p. 000 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for NARROW 0022 0000 to 0255 0023 0000 to 0255 0024 0000 to 0026 0000 to 0255 00 01 0255 00 01 00 01 0255 00 0029 0000 to 0025 0027 0028 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 01 02 03 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 03 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 0036 0000 to 0255 Send/read DRIVE gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read speech level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read CW side tone level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) CW side tone gain limit OFF CW side tone gain limit ON Send/read beep gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Beep gain limit OFF Beep gain limit ON Squelch mute effect OFF for audio output from USB-B connector Squelch mute effect ON for audio output from USB-B connector Send/read modulation level for audio input to USB-B connector (0000=0%, 0255=100%)
[MIC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA OFF
[ACC] selection for MOD input connector during DATA OFF Both [MIC] and [ACC] selection for MOD input connector during DATA OFF
[USB] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA OFF
[MIC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA1
[ACC] selection for MOD input connector during DATA1 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selection for MOD input connector during DATA1
[USB] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA1
[MIC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA2
[ACC] selection for MOD input connector during DATA2 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selection for MOD input connector during DATA2
[USB] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA2
[MIC] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA3
[ACC] selection for MOD input connector during DATA3 Both [MIC] and [ACC] selection for MOD input connector during DATA3
[USB] selection for MOD input connector dur-
ing DATA3 Lead selection for SEND relay type MOS-FET selection for SEND relay type Auto selection for external meter output S (receiving signal strength) selection for ex-
ternal meter output Po (TX output power) selection for external meter selection SWR selection for external meter output ALC selection for external meter output COMP selection for external meter output Vd selection for external meter output Id selection for external meter output Send/read external meter output level
(see p. 000) D Command table (continued) Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description 1A 05 0037 0000 to 0255 0038 0000 to 0255 0039 0000 to Send/read reference frequency
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read LCD backlight brightness level
(00=0% (dark), 255=100% (bright)) Send/read key backlight brightness level
(00=0% (dark), 0255=100% (bright)) Display type A selection Display type B selection Basic font selection Italic font selection Round font selection SLOW selection for meter response MID selection for meter response FAST selection for meter response Standard meter selection for normal screen indication Edgewise meter selection for normal screen indication Bar meter selection for normal screen indi-
cation Edgewise meter selection for wide screen in-
dication Bar meter selection for wide screen indication Meter peak hold function for Bar meter OFF Meter peak hold function for Bar meter ON Memory name indication OFF Memory name indication ON Audio peak filter width pop-up indication OFF Audio peak filter width pop-up indication ON Manual notch filter width pop-up indication OFF Manual notch filter width pop-up indication ON Screen saver OFF 15 min. selection for screen saver 30 min. selection for screen saver 60 min. selection for screen saver Bound selection for screen saver type Round selection for screen saver type Twist selection for screen saver type Opening screen indication OFF Opening screen indication ON 0052 see p. 000 Send/read opening screen contents. 0053 20000101 20991231 0054 0000 to to 2359 00 01 Send/read date
( 20000101=1st Jan. 2000, 20991231=31st Dec. 2099) Send/read time
(0000=00:00, 2359=23:59) Clock 2 OFF Clock 2 ON 0056 see p. 000 Send/read offset time for clock 2 0057 see p. 000 Send/read clock 2 name *Up to 3 characters 0058 Calibration marker OFF Calibration marker ON Confirmation beep OFF Confirmation beep ON Band edge beep OFF Band edge beep ON Band edge beep with user setting ON Band edge beep with user setting/TX limit ON Send/read beep audio frequency
(0050=500 Hz, 0200=2000 Hz) Auto selection for [RF/SQL]
SQL selection for [RF/SQL]
RF+SQL selection for [RF/SQL]
Quick dualwatch OFF Quick dualwatch ON Quick split function OFF Quick split function ON 0061 0050 to 0200 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 0065 see p. 000 FM split offset frequency setting for HF 0066 see p. 000 FM split offset frequency setting for 50 MHz 0067 00 01 00 01 Split lock function OFF Split lock function ON Tuner auto start OFF Tuner auto start ON 0255 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 03 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 03 0040 0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 0050 0051 0055 0059 0060 0062 0063 0064 0068 CONTROL COMMAND 12 Cmd. Sub cmd. 1A 05 0069 0070 0071 Data 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 Description PTT tune OFF PTT tune ON Antenna selection OFF Manual antenna selection Auto antenna selection Transverter functions automatically Transverter function ON 0072 see p. 000 Transverter offset frequency 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 1275 Hz selection for RTTY mark frequency 1615 Hz selection for RTTY mark frequency 2125 Hz selection for RTTY mark frequency 170 Hz selection for RTTY shift width 200 Hz selection for RTTY shift width 425 Hz selection for RTTY shift width RTTY keying with normal polarity RTTY keying with reverse polarity 1000 Hz selection for PSK tone frequency 1500 Hz selection for PSK tone frequency 2000 Hz selection for PSK tone frequency English selection for voice synthesizer speech language Japanese selection for voice synthesizer speech language Speech speed slow Speech speed fast S-meter level announcement OFF S-meter announcement ON Operating mode announcement OFF Operating mode announcement ON
[SPEECH/LOCK] key function setting
( Push momentariliy=SPEECH, Push and hold=LOCK)
[SPEECH/LOCK] key function setting
( Push momentariliy=LOCK, Push and hold=SPEECH) Number of memo pad channels 5 Number of memo pad channels 10 Auto TS for main dial OFF Auto TS for main dial ON with LOW Auto TS for main dial ON with HIGH LOW selection for microphone Up/Down speed HIGH selection for microphone Up/Down speed Quick RIT/:TX clear OFF Quick RIT/:TX clear ON Auto notch selection for SSB operation Manual notch selection for SSB operation Auto/Manual notch operation for SSB operation Auto notch selection for AM operation Manual notch selection for AM operation Auto/Manual notch operation for AM operation SSB/CW synchronous tuning function OFF SSB/CW synchronous tuning function ON LSB selection for CW normal side set USB selection for CW normal side set SHARP selection for APF type SOFT selection for APF type Voice memory transmission OFF with exter-
nal keypad Voice memory transmission ON with exter-
nal keypad Memory keyer transmission OFF with exter-
nal keypad Memory keyer transmission ON with exter-
nal keypad RTTY memory transmission OFF with exter-
nal keypad RTTY memory transmission ON with exter-
nal keypad PSK memory transmission OFF with exter-
nal keypad PSK memory transmission ON with exter-
nal keypad 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 153 12 CONTROL COMMAND D Command table (continued) Cmd. Sub cmd. 1A 05 0095 Data 00 Description 0096 0097 0098 0099 0100 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 03 04 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 0101 0010 to 0100 0103 0104 0105 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 Voice memory transmission OFF with [F1]
[F4] on the keyboard Voice memory transmission ON with [F1]
[F4] on the keyboard Memory keyer transmission OFF with [F1]
[F4] on the keyboard Memory keyer transmission ON with [F1]
[F4] on the keyboard CI-V transceive OFF CI-V transceive ON CI-V selection for [USB-B] usage Decode selection for [USB-B] usage 300 bps selection for decode speed 1200 bps selection for decode speed 4800 bps selection for decode speed 9600 bps selection for decode speed 19200 bps selection for decode speed English keyboard selection Japanese keyboard selection United Kingdom keyboard selection French keyboard selection French (Canadian) keyboard selection German keyboard selection Portuguese keyboard selection Portuguese (Brazilian) keyboard selection Spanish keyboard selection Spanish (Latin American) keyboard selection Italian keyboard selection Send/read keyboard repeat delay
( 0010=100 msec., 0100=1000 msec.;
50 msec. steps)
(00=2.0 cps, 31=30.0 cps) Scope indication during TX OFF Scope indication during TX ON Scope max. hold function OFF Scope max. hold function ON Filter center selection for scope center frequency Carrier point center selection for scope cent-
er frequency Carrier point center (Abs. Freq.) selection for scope center frequency 0102 00 to 31 Send/read keyboard repeat speed 0106 see p. 000 Send/read waveform color for receiving signal 0107 see p. 000 Send/read waveform color for max. hold 0108 00 0109 0110 0111 0112 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 02 00 01 02 154 SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 2.5 kHz span MID selection for scope sweep speed in 2.5 kHz span FAST selection for scope sweep speed in 2.5 kHz span SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 5 kHz span MID selection for scope sweep speed in 5 kHz span FAST selection for scope sweep speed in 5 kHz span SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 10 kHz span MID selection for scope sweep speed in 10 kHz span FAST selection for scope sweep speed in 10 kHz span SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 25 kHz span MID selection for scope sweep speed in 25 kHz span FAST selection for scope sweep speed in 25 kHz span SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 50 kHz span MID selection for scope sweep speed in 50 kHz span FAST selection for scope sweep speed in 50 kHz span Cmd. Sub cmd. 1A 05 0113 Data 00 0114 01 02 00 01 02 Description SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 100 kHz span MID selection for scope sweep speed in 100 kHz span FAST selection for scope sweep speed in 100 kHz span SLOW selection for scope sweep speed in 250 kHz span MID selection for scope sweep speed in 250 kHz span FAST selection for scope sweep speed in 250 kHz span 0115 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 0.03 to 1.60 MHz band 0116 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 1.60 MHz to 2.00 MHz band 0117 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 2.00 MHz to 6.00 MHz band 0118 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 6.00 MHz to 8.00 MHz band 0119 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 8.00 MHz to 11.00 MHz band 0120 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 11.00 MHz to 15.00 MHz band 0121 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 15.00 MHz to 20.00 MHz band 0122 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 20.00 MHz to 22.00 MHz band 0123 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 22.00 MHz to 26.00 MHz band 0124 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 26.00 MHz to 30.00 MHz band 0125 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 30.00 MHz to 45.00 MHz band 0126 see p. 000 Scope edge frequencies for 45.00 MHz to 0127 00 01 60.00 MHz band Auto monitor function OFF during voice memory transmission Auto monitor function ON during voice mem-
ory transmission 0128 03 to 10 Send/read voice memory short play time
(03=3 sec., 10=10 sec.) 0129 05 to 15 Send/read voice memory normal record time 0130 0131 00 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 0132 0001 to 9999
(05=5 sec., 15=15 sec.) Normal selection for contest number style 190ANO selection for contest number style 190ANT selection for contest number style 90NO selection for contest number style 90NT selection for contest number style M1 selection for count up trigger channel M2 selection for count up trigger channel M3 selection for count up trigger channel M4 selection for count up trigger channel Send/read present number
(0001=1, 9999=9999) 0133 01 to 60 Send/read CW keyer repeat time
(01=1 sec., 60=60 sec.) 0134 28 to 45 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash ratio 0135 0136 0137 0138 00 01 02 03 04 00 01 00 01 02 00 01
(28=1:1:2.8, 45=1:1:4.5) 2 msec. selection for rise time 4 msec. selection for rise time 6 msec. selection for rise time 8 msec. selection for rise time 10 msec. selection for rise time Normal selection for paddle polarity Reverse selection for paddle polarity Straight selection for keyer type BUG-KEY selection for keyer type ELEC-KEY selection for keyer type Mic. up/down keyer function OFF Mic. up/down keyer function ON D Command table (continued) Cmd. Sub cmd. 1A 05 0139 Data 00 Description RTTY decoder FFT scope averaging func-
tion OFF Number 2 selection for RTTY decoder FFT scope averaging function Number 3 selection for RTTY decoder FFT scope averaging function Number 4 selection for RTTY decoder FFT scope averaging function 01 02 03 0140 see p. 000 Set/read FFT scope waveform color set for 01 0144 0143 0142 0141 00 01 00 RTTY decoder RTTY decode USOS function OFF RTTY decode USOS function ON CR,LF,CR+LF selection for RTTY decode new line code CR+LF selection for RTTY decode new line code OFF selection for RTTY diddle BLANK selection for RTTY diddle LTRS selection for RTTY diddle RTTY encode USOS function OFF RTTY encode USOS function ON RTTY auto CR+LF by keyboards [F12] OFF RTTY auto CR+LF by keyboards [F12] ON RTTY time stamp OFF RTTY time stamp ON Local time selection for RTTY time stamp Clock2 selection for RTTY time stamp Frequency stamp for RTTY time stamp OFF Frequency stamp for RTTY time stamp ON 0149 see p. 000 Send/read received text font color for RTTY 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 0145 0146 0147 0148 decoder 0150 see p. 000 Send/read transmitted text font color (RTTY) 0151 see p. 000 Send/read time stamp text font color (RTTY) 0152 see p. 000 Send/read text font color in TX buffer (RTTY) 0153 00 PSK decoder FFT scope averaging func-
tion OFF Number 2 selection for PSK decoder FFT scope averaging function Number 3 selection for PSK decoder FFT scope averaging function Number 4 selection for PSK decoder FFT scope averaging function 01 02 03 0154 see p. 000 Set/read FFT scope waveform color set for 01 00 0156 0155 PSK decoder 8 Hz selection for PSK AFC function tun-
ing range 15 Hz selection for PSK AFC function tun-
ing range PSK time stamp OFF PSK time stamp ON Local time selection for PSK time stamp Clock2 selection for PSK time stamp Frequency stamp for PSK time stamp OFF Frequency stamp for PSK time stamp ON 0159 see p. 000 Send/read received text font color for PSK 00 01 00 01 00 01 0157 0158 decoder 0160 see p. 000 Send/read transmitted text font color (PSK) 0161 see p. 000 Send/read time stamp text font color (PSK) 0162 see p. 000 Send/read text font color in TX buffer (PSK) 0163 00 01 00 01 0164 0165 0000 to 0255 0166 0000 to 0255 LOW scan speed selection HIGH scan speed selection Scan resume OFF Scan resume ON Send/read VOX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) Send/read ANTI-VOX gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) 0168 0167 00 to 20 Send/read VOX delay time
(00=0.0 sec., 20=2.0 sec.) VOX voice delay function OFF Short selection for VOX voice delay Mid selection for VOX voice delay Long selection for VOX voice delay 00 01 02 03 CONTROL COMMAND 12 Cmd. Sub cmd. Data Description 1A 05 0169 0000 to 0255 Send/read NB level
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) 0170 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth 0171 0000 to 0255 0172 0000 to 0255
(00=1, 09=10) Send/read NB width
(0000=1, 0255=100) Send/read MONITOR gain
(0000=0%, 0255=100%) 06 07 08 09 0A 1B 00 01 1C 00 01 1E 00 01 02 03 see p. 000 Send/read DATA mode with filter set 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 02 WIDE selection for SSB transmit bandwidth MID selection for SSB transmit bandwidth NAR selection for SSB transmit bandwidth SHARP selection for DSP filter type SOFT selection for DSP filter type 3 kHz roofing filter selection 6 kHz roofing filter selection 15 kHz roofing filter selection WIDE selection for manual notch width MID selection for manual notch width NAR selection for manual notch width see p. 000 Send/read repeater tone frequency see p. 000 Send/read tone squelch frequency 00 01 00 01 02 Transceiver's condition (RX) Transceiver's condition (TX) Antenna tuner OFF (through) Antenna tuner ON Tuning Read number of available TX frequency band see p. 000 Read TX band edge frequencies Read number of user-set TX frequency band see p. 000 Send/read user-set TX band edge frequencies 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 155 12 CONTROL COMMAND D Data content description Operating frequency Command : 00, 03, 05 q w e r t X X X X X X X X 0 0 Band stacking register Command : 1A 01 q w X X X X Frequency band code Code Freq. band Frequency range (unit: MHz) i 9 0
:
t i g d z H 0 1 9 0
:
t i g d z H 1 i i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H 0 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 0 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 0 1 i 6 0
:
t i g d z H M 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H M 1 i 0
:
t i g d z H M 0 0 0 1
) d e x F
(
i i 0
:
t i g d z H M 0 0 1
) d e x F
(
i Operating mode Command : 04 q w X X X X q Operating mode w Filter setting 00: LSB 01: USB 02: AM 03: CW 04: RTTY 01: WIDE 05: FM 07: CW-R 02: MID 08: RTTY-R 03: NAR 12: PSK 13: PSK-R Memory keyer contents Command : 1A 02 X X X X X X w&1: Text data q: Channel data 01 M1 02 M2 03 M3 04 M4 Characters code Character ASCII code 09 AZ space
/
?
,
.
@
^
3039 415A 20 2F 3F 2C 2E 40 5E 2A Description Numerals Alphabetical characters Word space Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol Symbol e.g., to send bt, enter 5E 42 54 Inserts contest number (can be used for 1 channel only) 156 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 1.8 3.5 7 10 14 18 21 24 28 50 GENE Register code 1.800000 1.999999 3.400000 4.099999 6.900000 7.499999 9.90000010.499999 13.90000014.499999 17.90000018.499999 20.90000021.499999 24.40000025.099999 28.00000029.999999 50.00000054.000000 Other than above Code Registered No. 1 2 3 1 (latest) 2 3 (oldest) For example, when sending/reading the oldest con-
tents in the 21 MHz band, the code 0703 is used. Clock 2 offset time setting Command : 1A 05 0056 X X X X XX Shift direction 00: (minus) 01: + (plus) Offset time 00002400 Offset frequency setting Command : 1A 05 0065, 0066, 0072 q w e X 0 X X 0 X r*
XX
) d e x i f
(
0
:
t i g d i z H 0 0 1 9 0
:
t i i g d z H k 1 9 0
:
t i g d i z H k 0 0 1 9 0
:
t i g d i z H k 0 1 9 0
:
t i g d i z H M 0 1 4 0
:
t i i g d z H M 1 n o n o i t c e r i d
+
=
0 0 i t c e r i d
=
1 0
:
n o i t c e r i D
*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting. Transverter offset only; Fix to 0 for split offset setting. Codes for memory name, opening message and CLOCK2 name contents To send or read the desired memory name settings, the character codes, instructed codes for memory keyer contents, and follows are used. Characters code Alphabetical characters Character ASCII code Character ASCII code az 617A Characters code Symbols Character ASCII code Character ASCII code
!
$
&
?
+
:
=
>
)
]
}
_
@
21 24 26 3F 27 2B 3A 3D 3E 29 5D 7D 5F 40
#
%
`
;
<
(
[
{
|
23 25 5C 22 60 2D 3B 3C 28 5B 7B 7C 7E CONTROL COMMAND 12 Data mode with filter width setting Command : 1A 06 q w X X X X 00=Data mode OFF 01=FIL1 02=FIL2 03=FIL3 00=Data mode OFF 01=Data mode 1 (D1) 02=Data mode 2 (D2) 03=Data mode 3 (D3) Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency setting Command : 1B 00, 01 q*
w e 0 0 X X X X Color setting Command : 1A 05 0106, 0107, 0140, 0149, 0150, 0151, 0152, 0154, 0159, 0160, 0161, 0162 r q w e t y 0 X X X 0 X X X 0 X X X 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 R (Red) G (Green) B (Blue) Using 00000255 for each color element. Bandscope edge frequency setting Command : 1A 05 0115, 0116, 0117, 0118, 0119, 0120, 0121, 0122, 0123, 0124, 0125, 0126 r q w e t y
*
0
:
t i
*
0
:
t i i g d d e x F i i g d d e x F i 2 0
:
t i g d i z H 0 0 1 9 0
:
t i g d i z H 0 1 9 0
:
t i g d i z H 1 9 0
:
t i g d i z H 1 0
.
*Not necessary when setting a frequency. Band edge frequency setting Command 02, 1E 01, 03 q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2 X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 D X X X X X X X X X X 0 3 0 0
:
r e g m u n e g d E i 9 0
:
t i g d z H 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 1 9 0
:
t i g d z H 1 i i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 0 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 0 1 i 6 0
:
t i g d z H M 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H 0 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H M 1 i
) d e x i f
(
0
:
t i g d z H M 0 0 0 1
) d e x i f
(
0
:
t i g d z H M 0 0 1 i
) d e x i f
(
r e t a r a p e S i 9 0
:
t i g d z H 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 1 9 0
:
t i g d z H 1 i i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 0 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H k 0 1 i 6 0
:
t i g d z H M 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H 0 0 1 i 9 0
:
t i g d z H M 1 i
) d e x i f
(
0
:
t i g d z H M 0 0 0 1
) d e x i f
(
0
:
t i g d z H M 0 0 1 i X X X X X X X X X X X X Lower edge Higher edge
) d e x i f
(
0
:
z H 0 0 1 9 0
:
z H k 1 9 0
:
z H k 0 0 1 9 0
:
z H k 0 1 6 0
:
z H M 0 1 9 0
:
z H M 1 9 0
:
z H k 1
) d e x i f
(
0
:
z H 0 0 1 9 0
:
z H k 0 0 1 9 0
:
z H k 0 1 6 0
:
z H M 0 1 9 0
:
z H M 1 Lower edge Higher edge 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 157 12 CONTROL COMMAND D Data content description (continued) Memory content setting Command : 1A 00 q, w e ri o, !0 !1
!2!4
!5!7
!8@7 X X X X X X X X , X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
, X X q, w Memory channel number 00000099 : Memory channel 0 to 99 0100 0101
: Programmed scan edge P1
: Programmed scan edge P2 e Select memory setting 00 : OFF 01 : 1 02 : 2 03 : 3 ri Operating frequency setting See Operating frequency. o, !0 Operating mode setting See Operating mode.
!1 Data mode setting See Data mode setting.
!2!4 Repeater tone frequency setting
!5!7 Tone squelch frequency setting See Repeater tone/tone squelch setting.
!8@7 Memory name setting Up to 10 characters. See Codes for memory name, opening message and Clock 2 name contents. 158 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS 13
: (unit: MHz)
Receiver Receive system
: Double superheterodyne system 0.03060.000*1*2 Transmit
General Frequency coverage Receive Mode 3.5003.999*2, 1.8001.999*2, 5.33050*3, 5.34650*3, 5.36650*3, 5.37150*3, 5.40350*3, 10.10010.150*2, 7.0007.300*2, 18.06818.168*2, 14.00014.350*2, 24.89024.990*2, 21.00021.450*2, 28.00029.700*2, 50.00054.000*2
*1Some frequency bands are not guaranteed.
*2Depending on version. *3USA version only.
: USB, LSB, CW, RTTY, PSK, AM, FM No. of memory channels : 101 (99 regular, 2 scan edges)
: SO-239 2 and phono jacks Antenna connector
(RCA; 50 )
: 0C to +50C
; +32F to +122F Temperature range Frequency stability Frequency resolution Power supply Power consumption Transmit Receive Dimensions
(projections not included) Weight (approx.) ACC 1 connector ACC 2 connector CI-V connector Display
: Less than 0.5 ppm 1 min. after power ON. (0C to +50C; +32F to +122F)
: 1 Hz
: 13.8 V DC 15%
(negative ground)
: Max. power 23 A 3.0 A
: Standby 3.5 A Max. audio
: 340(W) 116(H) 279.3(D) mm 1338(W) 4916(H) 11(D) in
: 10.0 kg; 22 lb
: 8-pin DIN connector
: 7-pin DIN connector
: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (18)
: 5.8-inch (diagonal) TFT color LCD
Transmitter Output power (continuously adjustable) SSB/CW/RTTY/FM AM Modulation system SSB AM FM Spurious emission HF bands 50 MHz band Carrier suppression Unwanted sideband
: Less than 2 to 100 W
: Less than 1 to 30 W
: PSN modulation
: Low power modulation
: Phase modulation
: Less than 50 dB
: Less than 63 dB
: More than 40 dB suppression TX variable range Microphone connector ELEC-KEY connector KEY connector SEND connector ALC connector
: More than 55 dB
: 9.999 kHz
: 8-pin connector (600 )
: 3-conductor 6.35(d) mm (14)
: 3-conductor 6.35(d) mm (14)
: Phono jack (RCA)
: Phono jack (RCA) Intermediate frequencies :
1st 2nd
: 64.455 MHz 36 kHz Sensitivity (typical) SSB, CW, RTTY AM (10 dB S/N) BW=6 kHz
: 0.15 V (1.8029.99 MHz)*1
(10 dB S/N) BW=2.4 kHz 0.12 V (50.054.0 MHz)*2
: 6.3 V (0.11.799 MHz)*1 2 V (1.8029.99 MHz)*1 1.6 V (50.054.0 MHz)*2
: 0.5 V (28.029.99 MHz)*1 0.3 V (50.054.0 MHz)*2
*1Pre-amp 1 is ON, *2Pre-amp 2 is ON FM (12 dB SINAD) BW=15 kHz Squelch sensitivity (Pre-amp: ON) SSB FM Selectivity SSB (BW: 2.4 kHz)
: Less than 3.2 V
: Less than 0.3 V CW (BW: 500 Hz) RTTY (BW: 350 Hz) AM (BW: 6 kHz) FM (BW: 15 kHz)
: More than 2.4 kHz/6 dB Less than 3.8 kHz/60 dB
: More than 500 Hz/6 dB Less than 900 Hz/60 dB
: More than 350 Hz/6 dB Less than 650 Hz/60 dB
: More than 6.0 kHz/6 dB Less than 15.0 kHz/60 dB
: More than 12.0 kHz/6 dB Less than 20.0 kHz/60 dB Spurious and image
(IF lter shape is set to SHARP.)
: More than 70 dB rejection ratio AF output power
(at 13.8 V DC) RIT variable range PHONES connector External SP connector
: More than 2.0 W at 10%
distortion with an 8 load
: 9.999 kHz
: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (14)
: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm
(18)/8
Antenna tuner Matching impedance range HF bands 50 MHz band
: 16.7 to 150 unbalanced
(Less than VSWR 3:1)
: 20 to 125 unbalanced
(Less than VSWR 2.5:1) Minimum operating input : 8 W power Tuning accuracy Insertion loss (after tuning) : Less than 1.0 dB
: VSWR 1.5:1 or less 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 159 13 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS IC-PW1/EURO HF/50 MHz ALL BAND 1 kW LINEAR AMPLIFIER Full-duty 1 kW linear amplifier including an automatic antenna tuner. Has auto-
matic tuning and band selection capability. Full break-in (QSK) operation is pos-
sible. The amplifier/power supply unit and the remote control unit are separated. An optional OPC-599 is required for connection. PS-126 DC POWER SUPPLY AH-4 HF AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER AH-2b ANTENNA ELEMENT Output voltage : 13.8 V DC Max. output current : 25 A Specially designed to tune a long wire antenna for portable or mobile HF/50 MHz operation. The PTT tune func-
tion provides simple operation. Input power rating: 150 W A 2.5 m long antenna ele-
ment for mobile operation with the AH-4. Frequency coverage 754 MHz band with the AH-4 HM-36 HAND MICROPHONE SM-20 DESKTOP MICROPHONE SM-50 DESKTOP MICROPHONE Hand microphone equipped with [UP]/
[DOWN] switches. Includes [UP]/[DOWN] switches and a low cut function. Includes [UP]/[DOWN] switches and a low cut function. SP-23 EXTERNAL SPEAKER CT-17 CI-V LEVEL CONVERTER UNIT MB-121 CARRYING HANDLE 160 4 audio filters; headphone jack; can connect to 2 transceivers. Input impedance: 8 Max. input power: 4 W For remote transceiver control using a personal computer equipped with an RS-232C port. You can change fre-
quencies, operating mode, memory channels, etc., via your computer. Convenient when carrying the trans-
ceiver. UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 14 At least one available USB (2.0 or 1.1) port is required to copy the downloaded firmware file (USB hub may be required). The USB hub is not supplied by Icom. Ask your PC dealer about a USB for details.
General The IC-7600s firmware can be updated if desired. By updating the firmware, new function(s) can be added and the improvement of performance parameters can be obtained. 2 methods of firmware update are available: one uses the USB-Memory, and the other uses a PC. You can choose either methods according to your PC capabil-
ities. When only one PC connected to the Internet is available
Refer to Preparation (p. ??) and Firmware update USB-Memory (p. ??) When two or more PCs connected to the Internet are available and they are connected to a LAN
(Local Area Network)
Refer to Preparation (p. ??) and either
Firmware update PC (p. ??) or Firmware update USB-Memory (p. ??) Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the firmware if you have no PC.
Caution R CAUTION!: NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF while updating the firmware. You can turn the transceiver power OFF only when the transceiver displays that rebooting is required. If you turn the transceiver power OFF, or if a power failure occurs during updating, the transceiver firm-
ware will be corrupted and you will have to send the transceiver back to the nearest Icom distributor for repair. This type of repair is out of warranty even if the warranty period is still valid. Recommendation!
Backing up the settings and/or memory contents to the USB-Memory before starting the firmware update is recommended. Settings and/or memory contents will be lost or returned to default settings when the firmware update is performed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 161 14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
Preparation D Firmware and rm utility The latest firmware and the firm utility can be down-
loaded from the Icom home page via the Internet. Access the following URL to download the firm utility and the latest firmware. http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.html For updating from the USB-Memory When updating the firmware from the USB-Memory, copy the downloaded firmware data (e.g. 7600_110. dat) to the USB-Memory (in IC-7600 folder) using an available USB port (USB hub may be required; pur-
chased separately from your PC dealer). D File downloading q Access the following URL directly. http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/index.html w Click Firmware Updates/Software Downloads link then click the firmware file link. e Read Regarding this Download Service carefully, then click [AGREE]. http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support/download/firm/IC-7600/1_10/index.html r Click [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog. t Select the desired location in which you want to save the firmware, then click [Save] in the dis-
played File Download dialog. File download starts. y After download is completed, extract the file. The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in Read carefully Click Click Select the saving location zip format, respectively. When updating the transceiver using with the USB-
Memory, copy the extracted firmware (e.g. 7600_110. dat) to the USB-Memory IC-7600 folder. The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
7600. (p. ??) 162 7600_110.dat Click
Firmware update USB-Memory q Copy the downloaded firmware data into the USB-
Memory (IC-7600 folder). The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
7600. w Insert the USB-Memory into the USB connector. e Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary. r Push [SET] (F-6) to select set mode menu screen. t Push [USB] (F-6) to select USB-Memory set menu. UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 14
/
FIRM UP F-3 FIRM UP F-4 OK F-5 SET
/
USB F-6
/
CANCEL F-1
/
DIR/FILE F-2
/
EXIT/SET y Push and hold [FIRM UP] (F-3) for 1 sec. u Read the displayed precaution carefully. Push [Y] (F-1) or [Z] (F-2) to scroll the indication. Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the firmware updating. i After you read and understand all of the precau-
tions, push [OK] (F-5).
[OK] (F-5) appears only following the precautions. Push [CANCEL] (F-6) to cancel the firmware updating. o Push [Y] (F-2) or [Z] (F-3) to select the firmware file, then push [FIRM UP] (F-4).
!0 Read the displayed precautions carefully.
!1 If you agree, push and hold [OK] (F-5) for 1 sec. to start the firmware update. Push [CANCEL] (F-7) to cancel the firmware updating.
!2 While loading the firmware from the USB-Memory, the dialog as at left is displayed. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 163 14 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE
!3 After the firmware loading is completed, the trans-
ceiver starts the update automatically and the dia-
log at left is displayed. RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7600 power OFF at this stage. The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!4 When the dialog disappears, the precaution at left is displayed.
!5 Read the precaution carefully, and then push
[OK] (F-5). Return to USB-Memory set menu.
!6 Push [POWER] to turn the IC-7600 power OFF, then ON again.
!7 Depending on the update, one or two dialog boxes as at left appear in sequence. RWARNING!: NEVER turn the IC-7600 power OFF at this stage. The transceiver firmware will be corrupted.
!8 After the dialog disappears, the firmware updat-
ing is completed and normal operation screen appears.
SCOPEDSP UPDATING...
TRXDSP UPDATING...
Please wait for 10sec. 10sec. Please wait for 25sec. 25sec. WARING! NEVER turn power OFF. WARING! NEVER turn power OFF. 164 CE 15 INSTALLATION NOTES For amateur base station installations it is recom-
mended that the forward clearance in front of the an-
tenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effec-
tive Isotropic Radiated Power). The clearance height below the antenna array can be determined in most cases from the RF power at the antenna input termi-
nals. In all cases any possible risk depends on the trans-
mitter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-
mendation limits are specied as an average during 6 minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a timer circuit automatically cuts off the transmitter after 12 minutes etc. As different exposure limits have been recommended for different frequencies, a relative table shows a guideline for installation considerations. Similarly some modes of transmission, SSB, CW, AM etc. have a lower average output power and the as-
sessed risk is even lower. Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specied in terms of V/m or A/m elds as they are likely to fall within the near-field region. Similarly, the antennas may be physically short in terms of electrical length and that the installation will require some antenna matching device which can create local, high intensity magnetic fields. Analysis of such MF installations is best considered in association with published guid-
ance notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01 and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter installations. The EC recommended limits are almost identical to the FCC specied uncontrolled limits and tables exist that show pre-calculated safe distances for different antenna types for different frequency bands. Further information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/. Typical amateur radio installation Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra-
diation pattern is forward and that radiation vertically downwards is at unity gain (sidelobe suppression is equal to main lobe gain). This is true of almost every gain antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed to be beneath the antenna array and have a typical height of 1.8 m. The figures assume the worst case emission of a constant carrier. For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power density limits have been recommended:
1050 MHz 2 W/sq m Versions of the IC-7600 which display the CE symbol on the serial number seal, comply with the essential requirements of the European Radio and Telecommunica-
tion Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC. This warning symbol indicates that this equipment operates in non-harmonised frequency bands and/or may be subject to licensing conditions in the country of use. Be sure to check that you have the correct version of this radio or the correct pro-
gramming of this radio, to comply with na-
tional licensing requirement. List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1) Country Codes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Czech Republic Cyprus Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Latvia AT BE BG HR CZ CY DK EE FI FR DE GR HU IS IE IT LV Country Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey United Kingdom 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Codes LI LT LU MT NL NO PL PT RO SK SI ES SE CH TR GB Vertical clearance by EIRP output 2.1 m 1 Watts 10 Watts 2.8 m 3.4 m 25 Watts 100 Watts 5 m 12 m 1000 Watts Forward clearance by EIRP output 100 Watts 1000 Watts 10,000 Watts 100,000 Watts 2 m 6.5 m 20 m 65 m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 165 15 CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We Icom Inc. Japan 1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku Osaka 547-0003, Japan Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test Suite measurements have been performed. Dsseldorf 28th Nov. 2008 Place and date of issue Kind of equipment: HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER Type-designation: iC- 7600 Authorized representative name Y. Furukawa General Manager Version (where applicable):
This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised standards, specifications or documents:
i) ii) iii) iv) EN 301 489-1 v1.6.1 (September 2005) EN 301 489-15 v1.2.1 (August 2002) EN 301 783-2 v1.1.1 (September 2000) EN 60950-1 : 2001 Signature 166 MEMO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 IC-7600 #03
(Europe) IC-7600 #04
(Europe-1) IC-7600 #05
(Spain) IC-7600 #09
(Italy) IC-7600 #10
(France)
< Intended Country of Use >
AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG
< Intended Country of Use >
AT FI IT PL GB RO CY DE LT SK LI HR BE FR LV PT IS TR CZ GR LU SI NO DK HU MT ES CH EE IE NL SE BG A-6722H-1EX Printed in Japan 2008 Icom Inc. 1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2016-01-11 | 0.03 ~ 60 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2009-02-09 | 30 ~ 60 | CSR - Scanning Receiver | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2016-01-11
|
||||
1 2 |
2009-02-09
|
|||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
ICOM Incorporated
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005855366
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
1-1-32 Kamiminami Hirano-ku
|
||||
1 2 |
1-1-32 Kamiminami
|
|||||
1 2 |
Osaka, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
v******@ultratech-labs.com
|
||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
AFJ
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
307300
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
A**** T****
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
General Manager
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
+8166********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
+8166********
|
||||
1 2 |
w******@icom.co.jp
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
UltraTech Engineering Labs Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
J******** C********
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
3000 Bristol Circle
|
||||
1 2 |
Oakville, ON, L6H6G4
|
|||||
1 2 |
Canada
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
905-8********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
905-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
j******@ultratech-labs.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | CSR - Scanning Receiver | ||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | HF/50 MHz Transceiver | ||||
1 2 | HF/50 MHz TRANSCEIVER | |||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Change: Replaced some components such as diodes, inductors and capacitors in the RF and PLL units. | ||||
1 2 | This device is designed to receive from 30.00 kHz - 60.00 MHz. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
UltraTech Engineering Labs Inc.
|
||||
1 2 | Name |
T**** L****
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
905-8********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
905-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
t******@ultratech-labs.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 0.03000000 | 60.00000000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15B | 30.00000000 | 60.00000000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC